4-266-023-41(1)

CD/DVD Player

Reference Guide GB
GB
AR

PR

DVP-SR520P/DVP-SR750HP

© 2011 Sony Corporation

 this occur, the player may not States and other countries.
operate properly. In this case, (DVP-SR750HP only)
WARNING remove the disc and leave the • All other trademarks are
player turned on for about half an trademarks of their respective
hour until the moisture owners.
To reduce the risk of fire or evaporates. • THIS PRODUCT IS
electric shock, do not expose LICENSED UNDER THE
this apparatus to rain or MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT
moisture. Lightning
PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
To avoid electrical shock, do For added protection for this set
THE PERSONAL AND
not open the cabinet. Refer during a lightning storm, or when it
NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF
servicing to qualified is left unattended and unused for
A CONSUMER FOR
personnel only. long periods of time, unplug it
DECODING VIDEO IN
The mains lead must be from the wall outlet. This will
COMPLIANCE WITH THE
changed only at a qualified prevent damage to the set due to
MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD
service shop. lightning and power-line surges.
(“MPEG-4 VIDEO”) THAT
Batteries or batteries WAS ENCODED BY A
installed apparatus shall not Note about the discs CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
be exposed to excessive heat Do not use the following discs: PERSONAL AND
such as sunshine, fire or the – A disc that has a non-standard NONCOMMERCIAL
like. shape (e.g., card, heart). ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
– A disc with a label or sticker on OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
it. PROVIDER LICENSED BY
MPEG LA TO PROVIDE
Region code MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE
IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE
Your player has a region code
IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER
printed on the back of the unit and
USE. ADDITIONAL
only will play commercial DVDs
This appliance is classified as a INFORMATION INCLUDING
(playback only) labelled with
CLASS 1 LASER product. The THAT RELATING TO
identical region codes. This system
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL
is used to protect copyrights.
MARKING is located on the rear AND COMMERCIAL USES
exterior. AND LICENSING MAY BE
Commercial DVDs labelled ALL
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA,
will also play on this player.
CAUTION LLC. SEE
The use of optical instruments with HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
Depending on the commercial
this product will increase eye DVD, there may be no region code
hazard. As the laser beam used in indication, even though playing the About this manual
this CD/DVD player is harmful to commercial DVD is prohibited by • “DVD” may be used as a general
eyes, do not attempt to disassemble area restrictions. term for commercial DVDs,
the cabinet. DVP–XXXX
DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD+R
Refer servicing to qualified 00V 00Hz
X Region code DLs (+VR mode) and DVD-
NO.
00W

personnel only. RWs/DVD-Rs/DVD-R DLs (VR

0-000-000-00

mode, video mode).

Precautions • The “HDMI” and “PhotoTV
• To prevent fire or shock hazard,
Copyrights HD” logos on the front cover
do not place objects filled with • Manufactured under license apply to the DVP-SR750HP
liquids, such as vases, on the from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby only.
apparatus. and the double-D symbol are
• The player is not disconnected trademarks of Dolby
from the AC power source Laboratories.
(mains) as long as it is connected • “DVD+RW,” “DVD-RW,”
to the wall outlet, even if the “DVD+R,” “DVD+R DL,”
player itself has been turned off. “DVD-R,” “DVD VIDEO,” and
• Do not install this player in a “CD” logos are trademarks.
confined space, such as a • MPEG Layer-3 audio coding
bookshelf or similar unit. technology and patents licensed
• Install the player so that the AC from Fraunhofer IIS and
power cord (mains lead) can be Thomson.
unplugged from the wall socket • This DVD player incorporates
immediately in the event of High-Definition Multimedia
trouble. Interface (HDMI™) technology.
• If the player is brought directly HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and
from a cold to a warm location, High-Definition Multimedia
or is placed in a very damp room, Interface are trademarks or
moisture may condense on the registered trademarks of HDMI
lenses inside the player. Should Licensing LLC in the United

2GB
 TIME/TEXT
Playback Checks the elapsed time and the remaining
playback time.
Input the time code for picture and music search
Control Menu display (DVD and Xvid video files only).

Use the Control Menu to select a function and DISC/USB

to view related information. Selects either “USB” or “DISC” to be played.
Press DISPLAY. TOP MENU/MENU
To change the Control Menu display, press
(DVD VIDEO only)
DISPLAY again. TOP MENU: Displays the top menu.
MENU: Displays the menu.
REC TO USB
12(27) PLAY
18(34) DVD VIDEO Rips a CD, or copies photo, music and video
T 1:32:55 files to a USB device (page 6).
OFF
OFF
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST
SET
ON Selects the type of title (DVD-VR mode) to be
played: ORIGINAL, or edited PLAY LIST.
PROGRAM*1, *2
PROGRAM
ENTER Quit: DISPLAY Selects the title, chapter, or track to play in the
order you want.
1 Select “SET t,” then press ENTER and
select the title (T), chapter (C), or track (T)
A Control Menu items
GB
GB
you want to programme, and press ENTER.
B Currently playing title/Total number of 2 Repeat selecting the title, chapter, or track.
titles 3 Press N.
C Currently playing chapter/Total number SHUFFLE*1, *2
of chapters
Plays the title, chapter, or track in random order.
D Playing time
REPEAT*1, *2
E Selected media type
Plays all titles/tracks/albums or a single title/
F Playback status chapter/track/album/file repeatedly.
G Selected item icon/menu options
A-B REPEAT*1, *2
H Operation message
Specifies the parts you want to play repeatedly.
I Selected Control Menu item
1 During playback, select “SET t,” then
press ENTER.
Menu list The “A-B REPEAT” setting bar appears.
2 When you find the starting point (point A),
Item Item Name, Function press ENTER.
TITLE/SCENE/TRACK 3 When you reach the ending point (point B),
press ENTER again.
CHAPTER/INDEX
PARENTAL CONTROL
TRACK
Set to prohibit playback on this player.
Selects the title, scene, track, chapter, or index PLAYER t: Playback of some DVD VIDEOs
to be played. can be limited according to a predetermined
level such as the age of the users. Scenes may be
blocked or replaced with different scenes
(Parental Control).

,continued 3GB
 PASSWORD t: Enter a 4-digit password SHARPNESS
using the number buttons. Also use this menu to
change the password. Exaggerates the outline of the image to produce
a sharper picture.
Parental Control (limited playback) OFF: Cancels this option.
You can set a playback limitation level. 1: Enhances the outline.
1 Select “PLAYER t,” then press ENTER. 2: Enhances the outline more than 1.
Enter or re-enter your 4-digit password, then AV SYNC*3
press ENTER.
Adjust the delay between the picture and sound.
2 Press X/x to select “STANDARD,” then
This function is not effective when:
press ENTER.
– you use the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)
Press X/x to select an area, then press
jack, and set “DOLBY DIGITAL,” “MPEG,”
ENTER.
or “DTS” in “AUDIO SETUP” to “DOLBY
When you select “OTHERS t,” select and
DIGITAL,” “MPEG,” or “ON” respectively
enter a standard code. See “PARENTAL
(page 7).
CONTROL AREA CODE LIST” at the end
– you connect a Dolby Digital or DTS-
of this manual.
compliant device via the HDMI OUT jack,
3 Press X/x to select “LEVEL,” then press and set “DOLBY DIGITAL,” “MPEG,” or
ENTER. “DTS” in “AUDIO SETUP” to “DOLBY
Press X/x to select the level, then press DIGITAL,” “MPEG,” or “ON” respectively
ENTER. (page 7).
Parental Control setting is complete.
The lower the value, the stricter the 1 Select “SET t,” then press ENTER.
limitation. The “AV SYNC” adjustment bar appears.
To turn off the Parental Control function, set 2 Press c repeatedly to adjust the delay.
“LEVEL” to “OFF.” Each time you press C/c, the delay is
If you forget your password, enter “199703” in adjusted by 10 milliseconds.
the password box, press ENTER, and then enter 3 Press ENTER.
a new 4-digit password. The selected setting takes effect.
To reset the “AV SYNC” setting, press CLEAR
SETUP
in step 2.
QUICK: Use Quick Setup to choose the desired *1 To return to normal play, select “OFF” or press
language of the on-screen display, the aspect CLEAR.
ratio of the TV and the audio output signal. *2 The play mode is cancelled when:
CUSTOM: In addition to the Quick Setup – you open the disc tray.
setting, you can adjust various other settings – you turn off the player.
(page 7). 3 DVP-SR750HP only
*
RESET: Returns the settings in “SETUP” to the
default setting. ◆Items for DATA discs or USB

ZOOM*1 Item Item Name, Function

Magnifies the image up to four times the ALBUM
original size, scroll using C/X/x/c.
Selects the album that contains music and photo
ANGLE files to be played.
Changes the angle. FILE
CUSTOM PICTURE MODE Selects the photo file to be played.
Selects the picture quality that best suits the ALBUM
programme you are watching.
STANDARD: Displays a standard picture. Selects the album that contains the video file to
DYNAMIC: Produces a bold dynamic picture be played.
by increasing the picture contrast and the colour FILE
intensity.
CINEMA: Enhances details in dark areas by Selects the video file to be played.
increasing the black level.
MEMORY t: Adjusts the picture in greater
detail.

4GB
 DATE player turns back on, and the name of the
colour system will appear on the front panel
Displays the date the picture was taken by a display.
digital camera.
INTERVAL*1 To play VIDEO CDs with PBC
Specifies the duration for which the slides are functions
displayed on the screen.
When you start playing a VIDEO CD with
EFFECT*1 PBC (Playback control) functions, the menu
Selects the effects to be used for changing slides for your selection appears.
during a slide show.
MODE 1: The images randomly cycle through To play without using PBC
the effects. Press ./> or the number buttons while
MODE 2: The image sweeps in from top left to the player is stopped to select a track, then
bottom right. press N or ENTER. To return to PBC
MODE 3: The image sweeps in from top to playback, press x twice, then press N.
bottom.
MODE 4: The image sweeps in from left to
right.
To lock the disc tray (Child Lock)
MODE 5: The image stretches out from the You can lock the disc tray to prevent it being
centre of the screen. opened by mistake.
OFF: Turns off this function. When the player is in standby mode, press in
MEDIA order, O RETURN, ENTER, and [/1 on the
remote.
Selects the media type you want to play. The player turns on and “ ” (LOCKED)
VIDEO: Plays video files.
appears on the front panel display. The Z
PHOTO (MUSIC): Plays photo and music
button does not work while the Child Lock is
files as a slide show. You can view a slide show
set.
with sound when music and photo files are
placed in the same album. If the playing time of
either music or photos is longer, the longer one
To unlock the disc tray
continues without sound or image. When the player is in standby mode, press in
PHOTO (BGM)*2: Plays photo files with the order, O RETURN, ENTER, and \/1 on the
player’s internal background sound. To choose remote again.
the melody of the background sound, press
AUDIO repeatedly while viewing the image. Controlling TVs with the remote
PHOTO*3: Plays photo files.
MUSIC: Plays music files. Press SUBTITLE You can control the sound level, input source,
while playing music files that contain and power switch of your Sony TV with the
unsynchronized lyric information. The player supplied remote.
supports MP3 ID3 Lyrics only. If your TV is listed in the table below, set the
*1 appropriate manufacturer’s code.
Depending on the file, this function may not be
possible.
When you replace the batteries of the remote,
*2 DVP-SR750HP only set the appropriate code number again.
*3 DVP-SR520P only
1 While holding down TV [/1, press the
number buttons to select your TV’s
To change the colour system manufacturer’s code.
2 Release TV [/1.
If the on-screen menu of the player does not
appear on the connected TV, switch the
player’s colour system to match the colour
system of the TV (NTSC or PAL).
First turn off the player by pressing [/1. Next
press DISPLAY, enter “0” using the number
button, and then press [/1 on the remote. The

,continued 5GB
 Code numbers of controllable TVs 5 Press C/X/x/c to select albums, tracks or
Sony 01 (default) files, and press ENTER.
Hitachi 24 When selecting albums, tracks or files, the
JVC 33 REC LED indicator flashes.
The number of selected albums, tracks or files
LG/Goldstar 76
is displayed in the front panel display in
Panasonic 17, 49 recording standby mode.
Philips 06, 08, 72
6 Press N.
Samsung 71 When ripping a CD or copying data files, the
Sharp 29 REC LED indicator stays lit.
Toshiba 38 Recording is started. Recording progress is
displayed. After recording finishes,
Viewing a high quality slide “Completed” is displayed.

show (PhotoTV HD) To record simply

(DVP-SR750HP only) You can rip a CD or copy data files simply by
If you have a Sony TV that is compatible with pressing the REC TO USB button. When
“PhotoTV HD,” you can enjoy the best pressing the REC TO USB button, the display
quality images. “PhotoTV HD” is activated appears. Press N according to the display.
when the player is connected to a TV by an Recording is started.
HDMI cord and “JPEG RESOLUTION” in
“HDMI SETUP” is set to “PhotoTV HD” To erase “ALBUM,” “TRACK,” or “FILE”
(page 8). Press CLEAR. Follow the displayed
message.
Ripping a CD or copying data To remove the USB device
files to a USB device Stop playback, ripping a CD, or copying/
erasing data files, and then disconnect the
You can rip a CD or copy* data files to a USB
USB device from the USB jack. Do not
device. You cannot rip a CD or copy data files
remove the USB device during operation, as
while playing back a disc.
* Depending on the disc, copying may not be data corruption may occur.
possible.
To change LUN
REC LED For some devices, LUN (Logical Unit
Number) may appear. To change the LUN or
original storage, press when the list
of albums or tracks is displayed.

About supported USB devices

REC TO USB
• This player supports USB Mass Storage
Class only.
USB device
• This player supports FAT format USB
device only.
1 Insert a disc into the disc tray, and then • Some USB devices may not work with this
connect a USB device to the USB jack. player.
2 Press DISPLAY.
The Control Menu display appears.
3 Press X/x to select “REC TO USB.”
4 Press X/x to select the items to copy, and
press ENTER.
When ripping a CD, select “DISC” or
“TRACK.”
When copying data files, select “DISC,”
“ALBUM,” “TRACK,” or “FILE.”
If you select “DISC,” go to step 6.

6GB
 BACKGROUND: Selects the background
CUSTOM Menu colour or picture on the TV screen. If you set
“JACKET PICTURE,” even though the disc
does not contain a jacket picture, the
You can adjust various settings. “GRAPHICS” picture appears.
Press DISPLAY when the player is in stop PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT
mode, select (SETUP), and then ONLY)*2: Set to “ON” if your TV accepts
select “CUSTOM.” The CUSTOM menu progressive format signals. When you select
appears. “ON,” set also the following “MODE
(PROGRESSIVE)” and “4:3 OUTPUT.”
MODE (PROGRESSIVE): If you select
Menu list “AUTO,” the player detects the format (film-
based or video-based), and converts to the
Item Item Name, Function appropriate version.
LANGUAGE SETUP 4:3 OUTPUT: This setting is effective only
when you set “TV TYPE” to “16:9.” Select
OSD (On-Screen Display): Switches the “FULL” when you can change the aspect ratio
display language on the screen. on your TV.
MENU*1: Selects the desired language for the
disc’s menu. (DVD VIDEO only) CUSTOM SETUP
AUDIO*1: Switches the language of the sound AUTO STANDBY: Sets the Auto Standby
track. When you select “ORIGINAL,” the setting on or off. If you select “ON,” the player
language given priority in the disc is selected. enters standby mode when left in stop mode for
(DVD VIDEO only) more than 30 minutes.
SUBTITLE*1: Switches the language of the AUTO PLAY: When set to “ON,” the player
subtitle recorded on the DVD VIDEO. When automatically starts playback when the player is
you select “AUDIO FOLLOW,” the language turned on by a timer (not supplied).
for the subtitles changes according to the PAUSE MODE: Selects the picture in pause
language you selected for the sound track. mode. Normally select “AUTO.” When the
(DVD VIDEO only) picture is output in high resolution, set to
SCREEN SETUP “FRAME.” (DVD only)
TRACK SELECTION: Gives the sound track
TV TYPE: Selects the aspect ratio of the which contains the highest number of channels
connected TV. priority when you play a DVD VIDEO on
which multiple audio formats (PCM, MPEG
audio, DTS, or Dolby Digital format) are
16:9 recorded. If you select “AUTO,” priority is
given. (DVD VIDEO only)
IMAGE QUALITY*3: Selects the priority
display to either high quality image or quick
speed. (Photo files only)
4:3 LETTER BOX MULTI-DISC RESUME: Switches the Multi-
disc Resume setting on or off. Resume playback
can be stored in memory for up to 6 different
DVD VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs. If you start the
settings again, the resume point is cleared.
4:3 PAN SCAN (DVD VIDEO/VIDEO CD only)
AUDIO SETUP

COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD): Selects the AUDIO DRC (Dynamic Range Control)*4:
colour system when you play a VIDEO CD. If Set according the surrounding environment. Set
your TV is the DUAL system, select “AUTO.” to “TV MODE” when the smallest sounds are
SCREEN SAVER: When set to “ON,” the indiscernible, or set to “WIDE RANGE” when
screen saver appears when the player is in pause the listening environment is good, for example,
or stop mode for 15 minutes. Press N to turn in a home movie theatre.
off the screen saver.

,continued 7GB
 DOWNMIX*4: Switches the method for YCBCR/RGB (HDMI): Selects the type of
mixing down to 2 channels when you play a HDMI signal output from the HDMI OUT jack.
DVD which has rear sound elements (channels), Set to “RGB” if the playback picture is
or is recorded in Dolby Digital format. distorted. You cannot select this when “JPEG
Normally select “DOLBY SURROUND.” RESOLUTION” is set to “PhotoTV HD.”
DIGITAL OUT: Selects if audio signals are AUDIO (HDMI): Selects the type of audio
output via the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/ signal output from the HDMI OUT jack. Set to
HDMI OUT jack. When you select “ON,” set “PCM” if you connect the player to a TV that is
also the following “DOLBY DIGITAL,” not compatible with DOLBY DIGITAL/DTS/
“MPEG,” “DTS,” or “48kHz/96kHz PCM.” MPEG signals.
DOLBY DIGITAL: Selects the type of Dolby
*1 When you select “OTHERS t,” select and
Digital signal. Set to “D-PCM” when the player
enter a language code. See “LANGUAGE
is connected to an audio component without a
CODE LIST” at the end of this manual.
built-in Dolby Digital decoder.
*2 If the picture does not appear normally or goes
MPEG: Selects the type of MPEG audio signal.
blank, reset the setting. Press [/1 to turn off,
Set to “MPEG” when the player is connected to
enter “369,” and then press [/1 to turn on the
an audio component with a built-in MPEG
player again.
decoder.
*3 DVP-SR750HP only
DTS: Selects the type of DTS audio signal. Set
*4 This function affects the output from the
to “ON” when you play a DVD VIDEO with
following jacks:
DTS sound tracks. Do not set to “ON” when
– AUDIO OUT L/R jacks.
you connect the player to an audio component
– DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT
without a DTS decoder.
jack only when “DOLBY DIGITAL” is set to
48kHz/96kHz PCM: Selects the sampling
“D-PCM.”
frequency of the digital audio output signal.
(DVD VIDEO only)
HDMI SETUP*3
You can adjust items related to HDMI
connection.
HDMI RESOLUTION*2: Selects the type of
video signal output from the HDMI OUT jack.
If “AUTO (1920×1080p)” (default) is selected,
the player outputs video signals of the highest
resolution acceptable for your TV. If the picture
is not clear, unnatural or otherwise not to your
satisfaction, try another option that suits the
disc, TV/projector, etc. For details, refer also to
the instruction manual supplied with the TV/
projector, etc.
You cannot select this when “JPEG
RESOLUTION” is set to “PhotoTV HD.”
JPEG RESOLUTION: Selects the type of
JPEG resolution so that you can enjoy a high
picture quality via HDMI connection.
This setting is effective only when you set “TV
TYPE” to “16:9.” You cannot select this when
“HDMI RESOLUTION” is set to “720×480/
576p.” “(1920×1080i) HD ” and
“(1920×1080i) HD” are effective only when
you set “HDMI RESOLUTION” to
“1920×1080i.” If you set this setting to
“PhotoTV HD,” “(1920×1080i) HD ” or
“(1920×1080i) HD,” the effect, rotation, and
zoom functions are not available.

8GB
 c The player cannot play a recorded disc that is
Information not correctly finalized.

The player does not operate properly.

c When static electricity, etc., causes the player
Troubleshooting to operate abnormally, unplug the player.
If you experience any of the following
The disc tray does not open and “ ”
difficulties while using the player, use this
troubleshooting guide to help remedy the
(LOCKED) appears on the front panel
problem before requesting repairs. Should display.
any problem persist, consult your nearest c Child Lock is set (page 5).
Sony dealer.
The disc tray does not open and
The power is not turned on. “ ” (TRAY LOCKED) appears on
c Check that the power cord (mains lead) is the front panel display.
connected securely. c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized
Sony service facility.
There is no picture/picture noise appears.
c Re-connect the connecting cord securely. “C13” appears on the front panel display.
c The connecting cords are damaged. c Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth or check
c Check the connection to your TV and switch its format.
the input selector on your TV so that the signal
from the player appears on the TV screen. “C31” appears on the front panel display.
c Change the colour system of the player c Re-insert the disc correctly.
(page 5).
c The disc is dirty or flawed. There is no picture/sound when connected
c Press [/1 to turn off the player, and enter to the HDMI OUT jack. (DVP-SR750HP
“369” using the number buttons on the remote, only)
then press [/1 to turn on the player again. c Change the “HDMI RESOLUTION” setting
in “HDMI SETUP.” The problem may be
There is no sound. solved.
c Re-connect the connecting cord securely. c The equipment connected to the HDMI OUT
c The connecting cord is damaged. jack does not conform to the audio signal
c The player is in pause mode or in Slow-motion format, in this case set “AUDIO (HDMI)” in
Play mode. “HDMI SETUP” to “PCM.”
c The player is in fast forward or fast reverse c Try the following: 1Turn the player off and
mode. on again. 2Turn the connected equipment off
and on again. 3Disconnect and then connect
The remote does not function. the HDMI cord again.
c The batteries in the remote are weak.
c The remote is not pointed at the remote sensor
on the player. The player does not detect a USB device
c When you operate the player by pressing connected to the player.
buttons on the remote in sequence, press the c The USB device is not securely connected to
buttons within 5 seconds of each other. the player.
c The USB device or a cord is damaged.
The disc does not play. c Disc mode has not been switched to USB
c The disc is turned over. mode.
Insert the disc with the playback side facing
down.
c The disc is skewed.
c The player cannot play certain discs.
c The region code on the DVD does not match
the player.
c Moisture has condensed inside the player.

,continued 9GB
 • When playing visual data that is not
Playable file format supported by MPEG-4 format, only sound
Video: MPEG-1 (Cyber-shot data)/MPEG-4 will be heard.
(simple profile)*1/Xvid
Note about recordable media
Photo: JPEG (DCF format)
Some recordable media cannot be played on
Music: MP3 (except for mp3PRO)/WMA
(except for WMA Pro)*1, *2/AAC*1, *2/ this player due to the recording quality or
LPCM/WAVE physical condition of the disc, or the
characteristics of the recording device and
*1 Files with copyright protection (Digital Right authoring software. The disc will not play if it
Management) cannot be played.
has not been correctly finalized. Also some
*2 The player does not play coded files such as
Lossless. DATA discs created in Packet Write format
cannot be played.
Supported extensions: “.avi”, “.mpg”,
“.mpeg”, “.mp4”, “.jpg”, “.mp3”, “.wma”, For player that cannot play images that
“.m4a”, “.wav” contain a copy protection only
Supported discs: DVD, DVD±RW/±R/±R
Images in DVD-VR mode with CPRM
DL, Music CD/Super VCD, CD-R/-RW
(Content Protection for Recordable Media)
• DATA CDs recorded according to ISO protection may not be played.
9660 Level 1/Level 2, or its extended
format, Joliet. Note on playback operations of DVDs and
• DATA DVDs recorded according to UDF. VIDEO CDs
• The player will play any file in the above, Some playback operations of DVDs and
even if the file format differs. Playing such VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by
data may generate noise that can result in software producers. Since this player plays
speaker damage. DVDs and VIDEO CDs according to the disc
• To play a complex hierarchy of folders may contents the software producers designed,
take some time. Create albums with no some playback features may not be available.
more than two hierarchies. Also, refer to the operating instructions
• Some video, photo, and music files may not supplied with the DVDs or VIDEO CDs.
play, depending on the encoding/recording
condition. Note on discs
• To start playback and proceed to the next or This unit is designed to playback discs that
another album/file may take some time. conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard.
• The player will recognize a maximum of DualDiscs and some music discs encoded
200 albums and 600 files. It can recognize with copyright protection technologies do not
up to 300 music files and 300 photo files conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard.
when “PHOTO (MUSIC)” is selected. Therefore, these discs may not be compatible
• When erasing the album, the player may with this unit.
erase unshown files on the list menu of
ALBUM at the same time.
• The player may not play a combination of
two or more video files.
• The player cannot play a video file of size
more than 720 (width) × 576 (height)/2 GB.
• Depending on the file, playback may not be
smooth. You are recommended to create the
file at a lower bit rate.
• The player may not play back the high bit
rate video file on the DATA CD smoothly.
You are recommended to play back using
DATA DVD.

10GB
Specifications
System
Laser: Semiconductor laser

Inputs/Outputs
• AUDIO OUT (L/R): Phono jack
• DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL): Phono jack
• COMPONENT VIDEO OUT(Y, PB, PR):
Phono jack
• VIDEO OUT: Phono jack
• HDMI OUT (DVP-SR750HP only): HDMI
19 pin-Standard Connector
• USB: USB jack Type A, maximum current
500 mA (For connecting USB device)

General
• Power requirements: 110-240 V AC, 50/
60 Hz
• Power consumption:
10 W (DVP-SR520P)
12 W (DVP-SR750HP)
• Dimensions (approx.): 320 × 38.5 × 209
mm (width/height/depth) incl. projecting
parts
• Mass (approx.): 1.1 kg
• Operating temperature: 5 °C to 35 °C
• Operating humidity: 25 % to 80 %

Supplied accessories
• Audio/Video cord (phono plug × 3 y
phono plug × 3) (1)
• Remote commander (remote) (1)
• R6 (size AA) batteries (2)
• HDMI cord (1) (DVP-SR750HP only)

Specifications and design are subject to

change without notice.

11GB
LANGUAGE CODE LIST
1 Page 7

Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language

1027 Afar 1183 Irish 1347 Maori 1507 Samoan
1028 Abkhazian 1186 Scots Gaelic 1349 Macedonian 1508 Shona
1032 Afrikaans 1194 Galician 1350 Malayalam 1509 Somali
1039 Amharic 1196 Guarani 1352 Mongolian 1511 Albanian
1044 Arabic 1203 Gujarati 1353 Moldavian 1512 Serbian
1045 Assamese 1209 Hausa 1356 Marathi 1513 Siswati
1051 Aymara 1217 Hindi 1357 Malay 1514 Sesotho
1052 Azerbaijani 1226 Croatian 1358 Maltese 1515 Sundanese
1053 Bashkir 1229 Hungarian 1363 Burmese 1516 Swedish
1057 Byelorussian 1233 Armenian 1365 Nauru 1517 Swahili
1059 Bulgarian 1235 Interlingua 1369 Nepali 1521 Tamil
1060 Bihari 1239 Interlingue 1376 Dutch 1525 Telugu
1061 Bislama 1245 Inupiak 1379 Norwegian 1527 Tajik
1066 Bengali; 1248 Indonesian 1393 Occitan 1528 Thai
Bangla 1253 Icelandic 1403 (Afan)Oromo 1529 Tigrinya
1067 Tibetan 1254 Italian 1408 Oriya 1531 Turkmen
1070 Breton 1257 Hebrew 1417 Punjabi 1532 Tagalog
1079 Catalan 1261 Japanese 1428 Polish 1534 Setswana
1093 Corsican 1269 Yiddish 1435 Pashto; 1535 Tonga
1097 Czech 1283 Javanese Pushto 1538 Turkish
1103 Welsh 1287 Georgian 1436 Portuguese 1539 Tsonga
1105 Danish 1297 Kazakh 1463 Quechua 1540 Tatar
1109 German 1298 Greenlandic 1481 Rhaeto- 1543 Twi
1130 Bhutani 1299 Cambodian Romance 1557 Ukrainian
1142 Greek 1300 Kannada 1482 Kirundi 1564 Urdu
1144 English 1301 Korean 1483 Romanian 1572 Uzbek
1145 Esperanto 1305 Kashmiri 1489 Russian 1581 Vietnamese
1149 Spanish 1307 Kurdish 1491 Kinyarwanda 1587 Volapük
1150 Estonian 1311 Kirghiz 1495 Sanskrit 1613 Wolof
1151 Basque 1313 Latin 1498 Sindhi 1632 Xhosa
1157 Persian 1326 Lingala 1501 Sangho 1665 Yoruba
1165 Finnish 1327 Laothian 1502 Serbo- 1684 Chinese
1166 Fiji 1332 Lithuanian Croatian 1697 Zulu
1171 Faroese 1334 Latvian; 1503 Singhalese
1174 French Lettish 1505 Slovak
1181 Frisian 1345 Malagasy 1506 Slovenian 1703 Not specified
ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard

PARENTAL CONTROL AREA CODE LIST

1 Page 3

Code Area Code Area Code Area Code Area

2044 Argentina 2165 Finland 2362 Mexico 2149 Spain
2047 Australia 2174 France 2376 Netherlands 2499 Sweden
2046 Austria 2109 Germany 2390 New Zealand 2086 Switzerland
2057 Belgium 2248 India 2379 Norway 2528 Thailand
2070 Brazil 2238 Indonesia 2427 Pakistan 2184 United
2079 Canada 2254 Italy 2424 Philippines Kingdom
2090 Chile 2276 Japan 2436 Portugal
2092 China 2304 Korea 2489 Russia
2115 Denmark 2363 Malaysia 2501 Singapore
 ‫ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﮐﺪ زﺑﺎن‬
7 ‫! ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫زﺑﺎن‬ ‫ﮐﺪ‬ ‫زﺑﺎن‬ ‫ﮐﺪ‬ ‫زﺑﺎن‬ ‫ﮐﺪ‬ ‫زﺑﺎن‬ ‫ﮐﺪ‬

Samoan 1507 Maori 1347 Irish 1183 Afar 1027
Shona 1508 Macedonian 1349 Scots Gaelic 1186 Abkhazian 1028
Somali 1509 Malayalam 1350 Galician 1194 Afrikaans 1032
Albanian 1511 Mongolian 1352 Guarani 1196 Amharic 1039
Serbian 1512 Moldavian 1353 Gujarati 1203 Arabic 1044
Siswati 1513 Marathi 1356 Hausa 1209 Assamese 1045
Sesotho 1514 Malay 1357 Hindi 1217 Aymara 1051
Sundanese 1515 Maltese 1358 Croatian 1226 Azerbaijani 1052
Swedish 1516 Burmese 1363 Hungarian 1229 Bashkir 1053
Swahili 1517 Nauru 1365 Armenian 1233 Byelorussian 1057
Tamil 1521 Nepali 1369 Interlingua 1235 Bulgarian 1059
Telugu 1525 Dutch 1376 Interlingue 1239 Bihari 1060
Tajik 1527 Norwegian 1379 Inupiak 1245 Bislama 1061
Thai 1528 Occitan 1393 Indonesian 1248 Bengali; 1066
Tigrinya 1529 (Afan)Oromo 1403 Icelandic 1253 Bangla
Turkmen 1531 Oriya 1408 Italian 1254 Tibetan 1067
Tagalog 1532 Punjabi 1417 Hebrew 1257 Breton 1070
Setswana 1534 Polish 1428 Japanese 1261 Catalan 1079
Tonga 1535 ;Pashto 1435 Yiddish 1269 Corsican 1093
Turkish 1538 Pushto Javanese 1283 Czech 1097
Tsonga 1539 Portuguese 1436 Georgian 1287 Welsh 1103
Tatar 1540 Quechua 1463 Kazakh 1297 Danish 1105
Twi 1543 -Rhaeto 1481 Greenlandic 1298 German 1109
Ukrainian 1557 Romance Cambodian 1299 Bhutani 1130
Urdu 1564 Kirundi 1482 Kannada 1300 Greek 1142
Uzbek 1572 Romanian 1483 Korean 1301 English 1144
Vietnamese 1581 Russian 1489 Kashmiri 1305 Esperanto 1145
Volapük 1587 Kinyarwanda 1491 Kurdish 1307 Spanish 1149
Wolof 1613 Sanskrit 1495 Kirghiz 1311 Estonian 1150
Xhosa 1632 Sindhi 1498 Latin 1313 Basque 1151
Yoruba 1665 Sangho 1501 Lingala 1326 Persian 1157
Chinese 1684 -Serbo 1502 Laothian 1327 Finnish 1165
Zulu 1697 Croatian Lithuanian 1332 Fiji 1166
Singhalese 1503 Latvian; 1334 Faroese 1171
Slovak 1505 Lettish French 1174
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺸﺪه‬ 1703 Slovenian 1506 Malagasy 1345 Frisian 1181
1988 (E/F) ‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬:ISO 639

‫ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﮐﻨﱰل واﻟﺪﯾﻦ‬

3 ‫! ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺪ‬

Spain 2149 Mexico 2362 Finland 2165 Argentina 2044
Sweden 2499 Netherlands 2376 France 2174 Australia 2047
Switzerland 2086 New Zealand 2390 Germany 2109 Austria 2046
Thailand 2528 Norway 2379 India 2248 Belgium 2057
United 2184 Pakistan 2427 Indonesia 2238 Brazil 2070
Kingdom Philippines 2424 Italy 2254 Canada 2079
Portugal 2436 Japan 2276 Chile 2090
Russia 2489 Korea 2304 China 2092
Singapore 2501 Malaysia 2363 Denmark 2115
 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬
‫ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻟﯿﺰر‪ :‬ﻟﯿﺰر ﻧﯿﻤﻪ رﺳﺎﻧﺎ‬
‫ورودى ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ ﻫﺎ‬
‫• )‪ :AUDIO OUT (L/R‬ﻓﯿﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫)‪ :DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL‬ﻓﯿﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫•‬
‫)‪:COMPONENT VIDEO OUT(Y, PB, PR‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻓﯿﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫‪ :VIDEO OUT‬ﻓﯿﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪) HDMI OUT‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ :(DVP-SR750HP‬راﺑﻂ‬ ‫•‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ 19‬ﭘﯿﻨﯽ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪ :USB‬ﻓﯿﺶ ‪ USB‬ﻧﻮع ‪ ،A‬ﺟﺮﯾﺎن ﺣﺪاﮐرث ‪ 500‬ﻣﯿﻠﯽ‬ ‫•‬
‫آﻣﭙﺮ )ﺑﺮای اﺗﺼﺎل دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪(USB‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬
‫• ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﺑﺮق‪ 240 - 110 :‬وﻟﺖ ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب‪50/60 ،‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻣﴫف اﻧﺮژی‪:‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ 10‬وات )‪(DVP-SR520P‬‬
‫‪ 12‬وات )‪(DVP-SR750HP‬‬
‫اﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﯽ(‪ 209  38.5  320 :‬ﻣﯿﻠﯽ ﻣﱰ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻃﻮل( ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﯿﺮون زده‬
‫ﺟﺮم )ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﯽ(‪ 1.1 :‬ﮐﯿﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬ ‫•‬
‫دﻣﺎی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد‪ 5 :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 35‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮاد‬ ‫•‬
‫رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد‪ 25% :‬ﺗﺎ ‪80%‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه‬

‫• ﺳﯿﻢ ﺻﺪا‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ )ﭘﺮﯾﺰ ﺻﺪا ‪ y 3 ‬ﭘﺮﯾﺰ ﺻﺪا ‪(3 ‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫• ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﺪه راه دور )راه دور( )‪(1‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ‪) R6‬ﺳﺎﯾﺰ ‪(2) (AA‬‬
‫• ﺳﯿﻢ ‪) (1) HDMI‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪(DVP-SR750HP‬‬
‫ﻃﺮاﺣﯽ و ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺪون اﻃﻼع ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪11PR‬‬
 ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ درﺑﺎره رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺑﻪ دﻟﯿﻞ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﯾﺎ ﴍاﯾﻂ ﻓﯿﺰﯾﮑﯽ دﯾﺴﮏ ﯾﺎ‬
‫وﯾﮋﮔﯿﻬﺎی دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ و ﻧﺮم اﻓﺰار ﻣﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﻀﯽ رﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫وﯾﺪﺋﻮ‪) MPEG-1 :‬داده ‪MPEG-4/(Cyber-shot‬‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ را منﯽ ﺗﻮان روی اﯾﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫)منﺎﯾﻪ آﺳﺎن(*‪Xvid/1‬‬
‫ﮐﺮد‪ .‬اﮔﺮ دﯾﺴﮏ درﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻨﺎﻻﯾﺰ ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ منﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ‪) JPEG :‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪(DCF‬‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ دﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎی داده اﯾﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه در‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‪) MP3 :‬ﺑﺠﺰ ‪) WMA/(mp3PRO‬ﺑﺠﺰ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ Packet Write‬ﭘﺨﺶ منﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪WAVE/LPCM/2* ،1*AAC/2* ،1*(WMA Pro‬‬
‫*‪ 1‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی دارای ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ راﯾﺖ )ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺣﻘﻮق دﯾﺠﯿﺘﺎل(‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ دارای ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ منﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫درﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﮐﭙﯽ را ﭘﺨﺶ منﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬ ‫*‪ 2‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺪ دار از ﻗﺒﯿﻞ ‪ Lossless‬را ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ DVD-VR‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ‪CPRM‬‬ ‫منﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ درﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺑﺮای رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ( ﭘﺨﺶ منﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪه‪،".mpg" ،".avi" :‬‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫"‪،".wma" ،".mp3" ،".jpg" ،".mp4" ،".mpeg‬‬
‫"‪".wav" ،".m4a‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ درﺑﺎره ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮدﻫﺎی ‪ DVD‬و ‪VIDEO CD‬‬ ‫دﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪه‪DVD±RW/±R/±R ،DVD :‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮدﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺎ و ‪VIDEO CD‬‬ ‫‪ CD ،DL‬ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ‪CD-R/-RW ،Super VCD/‬‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻋﻤﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎن ﻧﺮم‬ ‫• ‪ DATA CD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ‪ 1‬و ‪ISO 2‬‬
‫اﻓﺰار ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬از آﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ اﯾﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ‪DVD‬ﻫﺎ و‬ ‫‪ 9660‬ﯾﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ آن‪.Joliet ،‬‬
‫‪VIDEO CD‬ﻫﺎ را ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮای دﯾﺴﮏ ﻃﺮاﺣﯽ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫• ‪ DATA DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ‪.UDF‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎن ﻧﺮم اﻓﺰار ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ‬ ‫• ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺣﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﯽ وﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ درد دﺳﱰس ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ اﯾﻦ داده ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ‪ DVD‬ﯾﺎ ‪VIDEO CD‬‬ ‫اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﯾﺠﺎد ﻧﻮﯾﺰ ﺷﻮد ﮐﻪ در ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮاب ﺷﺪن ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺨﺶ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮاﺗﺐ ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪه ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ درﺑﺎره دﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮل ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪ .‬آﻟﺒﻮم ﻫﺎ را ﺣﺪﮐرث ﺑﺎ دو ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ‬
‫اﯾﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺑﺮای ﭘﺨﺶ دﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬ ‫ﻣﺮاﺗﺐ اﯾﺠﺎد ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﯾﺴﮏ ﻓﴩده )‪ (CD‬ﻃﺮاﺣﯽ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪DualDisc .‬ﻫﺎ‬ ‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی وﯾﺪﺋﻮ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ و ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‬
‫و ﺑﺮﺧﯽ دﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﮐﺪﮔﺬاری ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﻓﻦ آوری‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﴍاﯾﻂ ﮐﺪﮔﺬاری‪/‬ﮐﺪﮔﺸﺎﯾﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ درﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد دﯾﺴﮏ ﻓﴩده‬ ‫• ﴍوع ﭘﺨﺶ و رﻓنت ﺑﻪ آﻟﺒﻮم‪/‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﯾﺎ آﻟﺒﻮم‪/‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬
‫)‪ (CD‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪارﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﯾﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ اﯾﻦ دﯾﺴﮏ‬ ‫دﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻃﻮل ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ اﯾﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﺣﺪاﮐرث ﺗﺎ ‪ 200‬آﻟﺒﻮم و ‪ 600‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ‬
‫ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرت اﻧﺘﺨﺎب "ﻋﮑﺲ )ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ("‪ ،‬ﺣﺪاﮐرث‬
‫ﺗﺎ ‪ 300‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ و ‪ 300‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﻣﯽ‬
‫دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• در ﺻﻮرت ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮدن آﻟﺒﻮم‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﻫﻢ زﻣﺎن ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن داده منﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ را در‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ آﻟﺒﻮم را ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺸﮑﻞ از دو ﯾﺎ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ وﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه منﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ وﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ ﺑﺰرﮔﱰ از ‪720‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 576‬ﻃﻮل(‪ 2/‬ﮔﯿﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ را ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﯾﮑﻨﻮاﺧﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد ﻓﺎﯾﻞ را ﺑﺎ ﴎﻋﺖ ﺑﯿﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺗﺮ اﯾﺠﺎد‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﻓﺎﯾﻞ وﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﴎﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫روی ‪ DATA CD‬را ﯾﮑﻨﻮاﺧﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ‪ DATA DVD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺨﺶ داده دﯾﺪاری ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ منﯽ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺻﺪا ﺷﻨﯿﺪه ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪10PR‬‬
 ‫‪ C‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه منﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ دﯾﺴﮏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ای ﮐﻪ درﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻨﺎﻻﯾﺰ ﻧﺸﺪه را ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه درﺳﺖ ﮐﺎر منﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬وﻗﺘﯽ اﻟﮑﱰﯾﺴﯿﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ و ﻣﻮاردی از اﯾﻦ ﻗﺒﯿﻞ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ درﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺎر ﮐﺮدن ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه را از ﺑﺮق‬ ‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﮑﻼت‬
‫ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫زﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﺧﻮردﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮای رﻓﻊ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ از درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﺗﻌﻤﯿﺮ‬
‫از راﻫﻨامی ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎن‬
‫" )‪ (LOCKED‬روی‬ ‫ﺳﯿﻨﯽ دﯾﺴﮏ ﺑﺎز منﯽ ﺷﻮد و "‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰدﯾﮏ ﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ‪ Sony‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫منﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻮدک ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(5‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه روﺷﻦ منﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺑﺮرﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﺮق ﻣﺤﮑﻢ وﺻﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫" )‪TRAY‬‬ ‫ﺳﯿﻨﯽ دﯾﺴﮏ ﺑﺎز منﯽ ﺷﻮد و "‬
‫‪ (LOCKED‬روی منﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻮﯾﺰ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ منﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ‪ Sony‬ﯾﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ‪ Sony‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﺮق را ﻣﺤﮑﻢ وﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺳﯿﻢ ﻫﺎی اﺗﺼﺎل ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﯾﺪه اﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن را ﺑﺮرﺳﯽ ﮐﺮده و اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ورودی‬
‫"‪ "C13‬در منﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫روی ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن را روﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه در‬
‫‪ C‬دﯾﺴﮏ را ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘامل متﯿﺰ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن ﻃﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ رﻧﮓ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه را ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ دﻫﯿﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(5‬‬
‫"‪ "C31‬در منﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ C‬دﯾﺴﮏ ﮐﺜﯿﻒ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺨﺪوش اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬دﯾﺴﮏ را دوﺑﺎره درﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﮔﺬاری ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ [/1 C‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﻮد و ﺑﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺪدی روی ﮐﻨﱰل از راه دور‬
‫وﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﯿﺶ ‪ HDMI OUT‬وﺻﻞ اﺳﺖ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫"‪ "369‬را وارد ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ [/1‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ دوﺑﺎره‬
‫ﺻﺪاﯾﯽ ﻧﺪارد‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪(DVP-SR750HP‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه را روﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت "‪ HDMI‬وﺿﻮح ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ" را در "‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ" ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ دﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺑﺮﻃﺮف ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪا ﭘﺨﺶ منﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬وﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻓﯿﺶ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﺮق را ﻣﺤﮑﻢ وﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل ﺻﺪا ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪارد‪ ،‬در اﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪" ،‬ﺻﺪا‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺳﯿﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﯾﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ "(HDMI‬را در "‪ HDMI‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ" روی "‪ "PCM‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬ ‫‪ C‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ آﻫﺴﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬راه ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی زﯾﺮ را اﻣﺘﺤﺎن ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ 1 :‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه را‬ ‫‪ C‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ رﻓنت ﯾﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ رﻓنت ﴎﯾﻊ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش و دوﺑﺎره روﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪2 .‬وﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬
‫و دوﺑﺎره روﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪3 .‬ﺳﯿﻢ ‪ HDMI‬را ﺟﺪا و دوﺑﺎره‬ ‫ﮐﻨﱰل از راه دور ﮐﺎر منﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﱰل از راه دور ﺿﻌﯿﻒ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﮐﻨﱰل از راه دور ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﮐﻨﱰل راه دور روی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ را ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ منﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه وﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ C‬وﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه را ﺑﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ C‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪ USB‬ﯾﺎ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﯾﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫روی ﮐﻨﱰل از راه دور ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎر ﻣﯽ اﻧﺪازﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ دﮐﻤﻪ را ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪ C‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ دﯾﺴﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻮض ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 5‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ از ﻫﻢ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫دﯾﺴﮏ ﭘﺨﺶ منﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬

‫‪ C‬دﯾﺴﮏ واروﻧﻪ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫دﯾﺴﮏ را ﻃﻮری ﻗﺮار دﻫﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬دﯾﺴﮏ ﮐﺞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﻌﻀﯽ دﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎ را ﭘﺨﺶ منﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ روی ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬در داﺧﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﻋﺮق ﮐﺮده اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪,‬‬
‫‪9PR‬‬ ‫اداﻣﻪ‬
 ‫" ‪ ، "(1920×1080i) HD‬ﯾﺎ "‪"(1920×1080i) HD‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ اوﻟﯿﻪ *‪ :4‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺨﺶ ﯾﮏ ‪ DVD‬ﺣﺎوی اﳌﻨﺖ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮدﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮه‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ و ﺑﺰرﮔﻨامﯾﯽ در‬ ‫ﺻﺪای ﻋﻘﺐ )ﮐﺎﻧﺎل ﻫﺎ(‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه در ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪Dolby‬‬
‫دﺳﱰس منﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،Digital‬روش ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ اوﻟﯿﻪ را ﺑﻪ ‪ 2‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎل ﻋﻮض ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫)‪ :YCBCR/RGB (HDMI‬ﻧﻮع ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮر ﻣﻌﻤﻮل "ﺻﺪای ﻓﺮاﮔﯿﺮ داﻟﺒﯽ" را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫از ﻓﯿﺶ ‪ HDMI OUT‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ دﯾﺠﯿﺘﺎل‪ :‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ آﯾﺎ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل ﻫﺎی ﺻﺪا‬
‫ﻣﺨﺪوش اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬روی "‪ "RGB‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ "وﺿﻮح ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬ ‫از ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻓﯿﺶ ‪DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/‬‬
‫‪ "JPEG‬روی "‪ "PhotoTV HD‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ منﯽ‬ ‫‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرت اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ اﯾﻦ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫"روﺷﻦ"‪ ،‬ﻣﻮارد زﯾﺮ را ﻧﯿﺰ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ "‪DOLBY‬‬
‫ﺻﺪا )‪ :(HDMI‬ﻧﻮع ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل ﺻﺪا از ﻓﯿﺶ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪ "DTS"، "MPEG"، "DIGITAL‬ﯾﺎ "‪48kHz/96kHz‬‬
‫را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه را ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻧﯽ وﺻﻞ‬ ‫‪."PCM‬‬
‫ﮐﺮده اﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل ﻫﺎی ‪DOLBY DIGITAL/DTS/‬‬ ‫‪ :DOLBY DIGITAL‬ﻧﻮع ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل ‪ Dolby Digital‬را‬
‫‪ MPEG‬ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ ،‬روی "‪ "PCM‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬وﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺪون ‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫در ﺻﻮرت اﻧﺘﺨﺎب "‪ t‬ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻣﻮارد"‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﮐﺪ زﺑﺎن اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫*‬
‫رﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎی داﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ وﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ وﺻﻞ اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬روی‬
‫و وارد ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪" .‬ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﮐﺪ زﺑﺎن" در اﻧﺘﻬﺎی اﯾﻦ دﻓﱰﭼﻪ راﻫﻨام‬ ‫"ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ‪ "D-PCM‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :MPEG‬ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل ﺻﺪای ‪ MPEG‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬وﻗﺘﯽ‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫*‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺪون ‪ MPEG‬رﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎی داﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ وﺳﯿﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت را ﻣﺠﺪدا ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ [/1 .‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ وﺻﻞ اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬روی "‪ "MPEG‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﻮد‪ "369" ،‬را وارد ﮐﺮده و ﺑﺮای روﺷﻦ ﮐﺮدن‬ ‫‪ :DTS‬ﻧﻮع ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل ﺻﺪای ‪ DTS‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎم‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺠﺪدا ‪ [/1‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﺑﺎ آﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪ DTS‬روی‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ‪DVP-SR750HP‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫"روﺷﻦ" ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺗﺼﺎل ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد ﺑﺮ ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ از ﻓﯿﺶ ﻫﺎی زﯾﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺪارد‪:‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﺪون رﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎی ‪ ،DTS‬روی "روﺷﻦ" ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫– ﻓﯿﺶ ﻫﺎی ‪.AUDIO OUT L/R‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫– اﮔﺮ "‪ "DOLBY DIGITAL‬روی "ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ‪"D-PCM‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﯿﺶ‪DIGITAL OUT‬‬
‫‪ :48kHz/96kHz PCM‬ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ منﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ‬
‫‪.(COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪای دﯾﺠﯿﺘﺎل را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪(DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ*‬
‫ﻣﻮارد ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل ‪ HDMI‬را ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬وﺿﻮح ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ *‪ :2‬ﻧﻮع ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل وﯾﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫از ﻓﯿﺶ ‪ HDMI OUT‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ "اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‬
‫)‪) "(1920×1080p‬ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮض( اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل ﻫﺎی وﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﯾﻦ وﺿﻮح ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل‬
‫ﺑﺮای ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن ﺷام را ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ واﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﯿﻌﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﯾﺎ رﺿﺎﯾﺖ ﺷام را ﺟﻠﺐ منﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬
‫دﯾﮕﺮی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ دﯾﺴﮏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن‪/‬ﭘﺮوژﮐﺘﻮر‪ ،‬ﻏﯿﺮه را اﻣﺘﺤﺎن‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬در ﺧﺼﻮص ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎت ﺑﻪ دﻓﱰﭼﻪ راﻫﻨامی اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن‪/‬ﭘﺮوژﮐﺘﻮر‪ ،‬ﻏﯿﺮه ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ "وﺿﻮح ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ‪ "JPEG‬روی "‪ "PhotoTV HD‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ منﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ اﯾﻦ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﺿﻮح ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ‪ :JPEG‬ﻧﻮع وﺿﻮح ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ‪ JPEG‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ و ﺷام ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ از ﻃﺮﯾﻖ اﺗﺼﺎل ‪ HDMI‬از ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻟﺬت ﺑﱪﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﯾﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت ﻓﻘﻂ وﻗﺘﯽ اﻋامل ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد ﮐﻪ "ﻧﻮع ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن"‬
‫را روی "‪ 16‬ﺑﻪ ‪ "9‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ "‪ HDMI‬وﺿﻮح‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ" روی "‪ "720×480/576p‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ منﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ اﯾﻦ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ "(1920×1080i) HD " .‬و‬
‫"‪ "(1920×1080i) HD‬ﻓﻘﻂ در ﺻﻮرﺗﯽ اﻋامل ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫"‪ HDMI‬وﺿﻮح ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ" روی "‪ "1920×1080i‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ اﯾﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت روی "‪،"PhotoTV HD‬‬

‫‪8PR‬‬
 ‫ﭘﺲ زﻣﯿﻨﻪ‪ :‬رﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ روی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن را‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ " ﻋﮑﺲ ﺟﻠﺪ ﺳﯽ دی" را ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮده‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﯿﺮﻏﻢ اﯾﻨﮑﻪ دﯾﺴﮏ ﺣﺎوی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺟﻠﺪ ﺳﯽ دی‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ "ﮔﺮاﻓﯿﮏ" ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ را اﯾﺠﺎد ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﴩﻓﺘﻪ )‪ :2*(COMPONENT OUT ONLY‬اﮔﺮ‬ ‫وﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﺳﺖ‪ DISPLAY ،‬را‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن ﺷام ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل ﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﭘﯿﴩﻓﺘﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬روی‬ ‫)ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ( را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﺮده و ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪،‬‬
‫"روﺷﻦ" ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬وﻗﺘﯽ "روﺷﻦ" را ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫"اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ" را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮی اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫"ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )‪ "(PROGRESSIVE‬و "ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ ‪ 4‬ﺑﻪ ‪ "3‬را ﻧﯿﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )‪ :(PROGRESSIVE‬اﮔﺮ "اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ" را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫ﻧﺎم ﻣﻮرد‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد‬ ‫ﻣﻮرد‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﻓﺮﻣﺖ )ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﯾﺎ وﯾﺪﯾﻮ( را ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ و ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت زﺑﺎن‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ ‪ 4‬ﺑﻪ ‪ :3‬اﯾﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت ﻓﻘﻂ در ﺻﻮرﺗﯽ اﻋامل ﻣﯽ‬ ‫‪) OSD‬منﺎﯾﺶ روی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ(‪ :‬زﺑﺎن منﺎﯾﺶ روی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ را‬
‫ﺷﻮد ﮐﻪ "ﻧﻮع ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن" را روی "‪ 16‬ﺑﻪ ‪ "9‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻮض ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ اﻧﺪازه ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ را روی ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن ﺧﻮد‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ*‪ :1‬زﺑﺎن دﻟﺨﻮاه را ﺑﺮای ﻣﻨﻮی دﯾﺴﮏ )ﻓﻘﻂ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ دﻫﯿﺪ‪" ،‬ﮐﺎﻣﻞ" را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (VIDEO‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت دﻟﺨﻮاه‬ ‫ﺻﺪا*‪ :1‬زﺑﺎن آﻫﻨﮓ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ را ﻋﻮض ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرت‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر را روی روﺷﻦ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب "اﺻﻠﯽ"‪ ،‬زﺑﺎن ﺗﺮﺟﯿﺤﯽ دﯾﺴﮏ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرت اﻧﺘﺨﺎب "روﺷﻦ"‪ ،‬اﮔﺮ‬ ‫)ﻓﻘﻂ ‪(DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﯿﺶ از ‪ 30‬دﻗﯿﻘﻪ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ مبﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫زﯾﺮﻧﻮﯾﺲ*‪ :1‬زﺑﺎن زﯾﺮﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه روی ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻣﯽ رود‪.‬‬ ‫‪ VIDEO‬را ﻋﻮض ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرت اﻧﺘﺨﺎب " ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت‬
‫اﺟﺮای اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‪ :‬اﮔﺮ روی "روﺷﻦ" ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬وﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺻﺪا ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس زﯾﺮﻧﻮﯾﺲ"‪ ،‬زﺑﺎن زﯾﺮﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ زﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﻪ وﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ )اراﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳﺖ( روﺷﻦ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر‬ ‫ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس زﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮای آﻫﻨﮓ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﺮده اﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر ﴍوع ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪(DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻌﻤﻮل "اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ" را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻮع ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن‪ :‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ اﻧﺪازه ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن ﻣﺘﺼﻞ را‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬وﻗﺘﯽ وﺿﻮح ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻋﺎﻟﯽ اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬روی "ﻓﺮﯾﻢ"‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪(DVD‬‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب آﻫﻨﮓ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﮐﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ )‪ ،PCM‬ﺻﺪای ‪ DTS ،MPEG‬ﯾﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﺑﻪ ‪9‬‬
‫‪ (Dolby Digital‬روی آن ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه‪ ،‬اوﻟﻮﯾﺖ را ﺑﻪ آﻫﻨﮓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﱰﯾﻦ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﮐﺎﻧﺎل ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرت اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫"اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ"‪ ،‬اﻟﻮﯾﺖ داده ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪(DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ*‪ :3‬منﺎﯾﺶ ﺗﺮﺟﯿﺤﯽ را ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﮐﺎدر ‪ 4‬ﺑﻪ ‪3‬‬
‫ﯾﺎ ﴎﻋﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ دﯾﺴﮏ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ دﯾﺴﮏ را‬
‫روﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ را ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮان ﺣﺪاﮐرث‬
‫ﺑﺮای ‪ DVD VIDEO/VIDEO CD 6‬در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ذﺧﯿﺮه‬ ‫ﭘﻦ اﺳﮑﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺑﻪ ‪3‬‬
‫ﮐﺮد‪ .‬اﮔﺮ دوﺑﺎره ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت را ﴍوع ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﭘﺎک‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪(DVD VIDEO/VIDEO CD‬‬ ‫ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ رﻧﮓ )‪ :(VIDEO CD‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺨﺶ ‪VIDEO‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت ﺻﺪا‬ ‫‪ ،CD‬ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ رﻧﮓ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن ﺷام در‬
‫ﺻﺪای ‪) DRC‬ﮐﻨﱰل داﻣﻨﻪ دﯾﻨﺎﻣﯿﮏ( *‪ :4‬ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬ ‫ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ اﺳﺖ‪" ،‬اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ" را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻃﺮاف ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬وﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ منﺎﯾﺶ‪ :‬اﮔﺮ روی "روﺷﻦ" ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﯿﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬روی "ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن" ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ وﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬ ‫وﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ‪ 15‬دﻗﯿﻘﻪ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﯾﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮای ﺷﻨﯿﺪن ﺧﻮب اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮای ﻣﺜﺎل در ﺳﺎﻟﻦ ﺳﯿﻨامی‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ منﺎﯾﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﻮادﮔﯽ روی "‪ "WIDE RANGE‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮای ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﮐﺮدن ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ منﺎﯾﺶ‪ N ،‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪,‬‬
‫‪7PR‬‬ ‫اداﻣﻪ‬
 ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮدن ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی داده‪" ،‬دﯾﺴﮏ"‪" ،‬آﻟﺒﻮم"‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷامره ﻫﺎی ﮐﺪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﻨﱰل‬
‫"آﻫﻨﮓ"‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ "ﻓﺎﯾﻞ" را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) 01‬ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮض(‬ ‫‪Sony‬‬
‫در ﺻﻮرت اﻧﺘﺨﺎب "دﯾﺴﮏ"‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ 6‬ﺑﺮوﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪Hitachi‬‬
‫ﺑﺮای اﻧﺘﺨﺎب آﻟﺒﻮم ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬آﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ‪C/X/x/c ،‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪JVC‬‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫‪LG/Goldstar‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺘﺨﺎب آﻟﺒﻮم ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬آﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮاغ ‪REC‬‬ ‫‪49 ،17‬‬ ‫‪Panasonic‬‬
‫‪ LED‬ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ زﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪72 ،08 ،06‬‬ ‫‪Philips‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪاد آﻟﺒﻮم ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬آﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﮐﺎر در منﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ منﺎﯾﺶ داده ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪Sharp‬‬
‫‪ N‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪Toshiba‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم راﯾﺖ ﮐﺮدن ‪ CD‬ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮدن ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی داده‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﺮاغ ‪ REC LED‬روﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﯾﮏ منﺎﯾﺶ اﺳﻼﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﴍوع ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﭘﯿﴩﻓﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ منﺎﯾﺶ داده ﻣﯽ‬ ‫)‪(PhotoTV HD‬‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﭘﺲ از ﺿﺒﻂ‪" ،‬ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪ‪ ".‬منﺎﯾﺶ داده ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ ‪(DVP-SR750HP‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ آﺳﺎن‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن ‪ Sony‬ﺷام ﺑﺎ "‪ "PhotoTV HD‬ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ،REC TO USB‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ از ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﱰﯾﻦ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻟﺬت ﺑﱪﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫راﺣﺘﯽ ‪ CD‬راﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی داده را ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫وﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺳﯿﻢ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن وﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ،REC TO USB‬منﺎﯾﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻮد و "وﺿﻮح ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ‪ "JPEG‬در "‪ HDMI‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ" روی‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ منﺎﯾﺶ‪ N ،‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫"‪ "PhotoTV HD‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﻮد‪"PhotoTV HD" ،‬‬
‫ﴍوع ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(8‬‬
‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮدن "آﻟﺒﻮم"‪" ،‬آﻫﻨﮓ" ﯾﺎ "ﻓﺎﯾﻞ"‬ ‫راﯾﺖ ﮐﺮدن ‪ CD‬ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮدن ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی داده‬
‫‪ CLEAR‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﯿﺎم منﺎﯾﺶ داده ﺷﺪه را دﻧﺒﺎل‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫روی دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ‪ CD‬راﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی داده را روی‬
‫ﺟﺪا ﮐﺮدن دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪USB‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪ USB‬ﮐﭙﯽ* ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺨﺶ دﯾﺴﮏ منﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬راﯾﺖ ﮐﺮدن ‪ CD‬ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮدن‪/‬ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮدم ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ‪ CD‬راﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی داده را ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫داده را ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮده‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪ USB‬را از ﻓﯿﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع دﯾﺴﮏ‪ ،‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮدن ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ اﻣﮑﺎن ﭘﺬﯾﺮ‬ ‫*‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺟﺪا ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬در ﻃﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎت دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪ USB‬را ﺟﺪا‬ ‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬زﯾﺮا ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ داده ﻫﺎ ﻣﺨﺪوش ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪REC LED‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ دادن ‪LUN‬‬

‫در ﺑﺮﺧﯽ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ ‪) LUN‬ﺷامره واﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﯽ( ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺮای ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ دادن ‪ LUN‬ﯾﺎ ﻣﮑﺎن‬
‫ذﺧﯿﺮه اﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬وﻗﺘﯽ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ آﻟﺒﻮم ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ آﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ منﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫داده ﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫‪REC TO USB‬‬
‫درﺑﺎره دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪه ‪USB‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪USB‬‬
‫• اﯾﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﻓﻘﻂ از ﮐﻼس ذﺧﯿﺮه اﻧﺒﻮه ‪USB‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﯾﮏ دﯾﺴﮏ در ﺳﯿﻨﯽ دﯾﺴﮏ ﻗﺮار داده‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮏ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫• اﯾﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﻓﻘﻂ از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪ USB‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪FAT‬‬ ‫‪ USB‬را ﺑﻪ ﻓﯿﺶ ‪ USB‬وﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ DISPLAY‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎی ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎ اﯾﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫•‬ ‫منﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﻨﱰل ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﮐﺎر ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮای اﻧﺘﺨﺎب "‪ X/x ،"REC TO USB‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﺮای اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮارد ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﭙﯽ‪ X/x ،‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم راﯾﺖ ﮐﺮدن ‪" ،CD‬دﯾﺴﮏ" ﯾﺎ "آﻫﻨﮓ" را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪6PR‬‬
 ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد ‪PBC‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﯾﺦ‬
‫وﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮدﻫﺎی ‪) PBC‬ﮐﻨﱰل ﭘﺨﺶ( ﴍوع ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﯾﺦ ﮔﺮﻓنت ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ دورﺑﯿﻦ دﯾﺠﯿﺘﺎﻟﯽ را منﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﯾﮏ ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮ ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫وﻗﻔﻪ*‬
‫ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن منﺎﯾﺶ اﺳﻼﯾﺪﻫﺎ روی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ را ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ‪PBC‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫وﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮای اﻧﺘﺨﺎب آﻫﻨﮓ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮه منﺎﯾﺶ ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ*‬
‫>‪ ./‬ﯾﺎ دﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺪدی را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮه ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ دادن اﺳﻼﯾﺪﻫﺎ در ﻃﯽ‬
‫‪ N‬ﯾﺎ ‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮای ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫منﺎﯾﺶ اﺳﻼﯾﺪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،PBC‬دوﺑﺎر ‪ ،x‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ N‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :1‬ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر اﺗﻔﺎﻗﯽ در ﺟﻠﻮه ﻫﺎ دور ﻣﯽ زﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :2‬اﯾﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ از ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮدن ﺳﯿﻨﯽ دﯾﺴﮏ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻮدک(‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮای ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی از ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن ﺳﯿﻨﯽ دﯾﺴﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر اﺷﺘﺒﺎه‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :3‬اﯾﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ از ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ آن را ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :4‬اﯾﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ از ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ راﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎر اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :5‬اﯾﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ از ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺴﱰده ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ ENTER ،O RETURN‬و ‪ [/1‬روی ﮐﻨﱰل از راه‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‪ :‬اﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دور را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫" )‪(LOCKED‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه روﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد و "‬ ‫ﻧﻮع رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫در منﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬وﻗﺘﯽ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻮدک‬ ‫وﯾﺪﯾﻮ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی وﯾﺪﯾﻮﯾﯽ را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬دﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Z‬ﮐﺎر منﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ )ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ(‪ :‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ و ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬
‫منﺎﯾﺶ اﺳﻼﯾﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ و ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺎز ﮐﺮدن ﺳﯿﻨﯽ دﯾﺴﮏ‬ ‫در ﯾﮏ آﻟﺒﻮم ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ منﺎﯾﺶ اﺳﻼﯾﺪ را ﺑﺎ‬
‫وﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎر اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ‬ ‫ﺻﺪا ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ زﻣﺎن ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ENTER ،O RETURN‬و ‪ \/1‬روی ﮐﻨﱰل از راه‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬آﻧﮑﻪ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺪون ﺻﺪا ﯾﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫دور را دوﺑﺎره ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اداﻣﻪ ﻣﯽ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﱰل ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﱰل از راه دور‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ )‪ :2*(BGM‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ را ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪای ﭘﺲ زﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬
‫داﺧﻠﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮای اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻠﻮدی‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﱰل از راه دور اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯿﺰان ﺻﺪا‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﺪای ﭘﺲ زﻣﯿﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‪ AUDIO ،‬را ﻣﮑﺮرا‬
‫ورودی و ﮐﻠﯿﺪ روﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن ‪ Sony‬ﺧﻮد را‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﱰل ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ*‪ :3‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن ﺷام در ﺟﺪول زﯾﺮ آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﺪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺻﺤﯿﺢ را ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺣﺎوی اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺗﺮاﻧﻪ ﻫﻤﮕﺎم ﺳﺎزی ﻧﺸﺪه‪،‬‬
‫وﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﱰل از راه دور را ﻋﻮض ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ SUBTITLE‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺮاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫دوﺑﺎره ﺷامره ﮐﺪ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ را ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ MP3 ID3‬را ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬در ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ TV [/1‬را ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ اﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮای‬ ‫*‪ 1‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ اﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد اﻣﮑﺎن ﭘﺬﯾﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﺪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن‪ ،‬دﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺪدی را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫*‪ 2‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪DVP-SR750HP‬‬
‫دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ 3‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪DVP-SR520P‬‬
‫‪ TV [/1 2‬را رﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ دادن ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ رﻧﮓ‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی روی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه در ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ رﻧﮓ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه را ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ دﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ رﻧﮓ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن )‪ NTSC‬ﯾﺎ ‪ (PAL‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ‪ @/1‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ DISPLAY‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺪدی "‪ "0‬را وارد ﮐﺮده و ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ @/1‬روی ﮐﻨﱰل از راه دور‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪه و ﻧﺎم ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ رﻧﮓ‬
‫روی منﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪5PR‬‬ ‫اداﻣﻪ‬
 ‫وﺿﻮح‬ ‫ﮐﻨﱰل واﻟﺪﯾﻦ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺤﺪود(‬
‫ﺑﺮای ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ دﻗﯿﻖ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﻮط ﺑﯿﺮوﻧﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ را ﺗﺸﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺤﺪودﯾﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ t " 1‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه"‪ ،‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﺮده‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ENTER‬را‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‪ :‬اﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ را ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺧﻄﻮط ﺑﯿﺮوﻧﯽ را ﺗﻘﻮﯾﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫رﻣﺰ ‪ 4‬رﻗﻤﯽ ﺧﻮد را وارد ﮐﺮده ﯾﺎ دوﺑﺎره وارد ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﺧﻄﻮط ﺑﯿﺮوﻧﯽ را ﺑﯿﺶ از ‪ 1‬ﺗﻘﻮﯾﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻫامﻫﻨﮓ ﺳﺎزی ﺻﺪا و ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ*‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮای اﻧﺘﺨﺎب "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد"‪ X/x ،‬و ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ENTER‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﯿﺮ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ و ﺻﺪا را ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد در‬ ‫ﺑﺮای اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‪ X/x ،‬و ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ENTER‬را‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ زﯾﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ منﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬اﮔﺮ از ﻓﯿﺶ )‪DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺘﺨﺎب "‪ t‬ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻣﻮارد"‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﮐﺪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮐﻨﯿﺪ و "‪،"MPEG" ،"DOLBY DIGITAL‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب و وارد ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ "ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﮐﻨﱰل واﻟﺪﯾﻦ"‬
‫ﯾﺎ "‪ "DTS‬را در "ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت ﺻﺪا" ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ روی‬ ‫در اﻧﺘﻬﺎی اﯾﻦ دﻓﱰﭼﻪ راﻫﻨام ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ ،"MPEG" ،"DOLBY DIGITAL‬ﯾﺎ "روﺷﻦ" ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮای اﻧﺘﺨﺎب "ﺳﻄﺢ"‪ X/x ،‬و ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(8‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﯾﮏ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪ Dolby Digital‬ﯾﺎ ‪ DTS‬را از ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻓﯿﺶ‬ ‫دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ HDMI OUT‬وﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ و "‪،"DOLBY DIGITAL‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮای اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺳﻄﺢ‪ X/x ،‬و ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫"‪ ،"MPEG‬ﯾﺎ "‪ "DTS‬را در "ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت ﺻﺪا" ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ‬ ‫دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫روی "‪ ،"MPEG" ،"DOLBY DIGITAL‬ﯾﺎ "روﺷﻦ"‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت ﮐﻨﱰل واﻟﺪﯾﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(8‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﮐﻤﱰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪودﯾﺖ ﺷﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t" 1‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ" را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﺮده‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫ﺑﺮای ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﮐﺮدن ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد ﮐﻨﱰل واﻟﺪﯾﻦ‪" ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ" را روی‬
‫دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫"ﺧﺎﻣﻮش" ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮار ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ "ﻫامﻫﻨﮓ ﺳﺎزی ﺻﺪا و ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ" ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻓﺮاﻣﻮش ﮐﺮدن رﻣﺰ ﺧﻮد‪ "199703" ،‬را در‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎدر رﻣﺰ وارد ﮐﺮده‪ ENTER ،‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮏ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮای ﺗﻌﺪﯾﻞ ﺗﺄﺧﯿﺮ‪ c ،‬را ﻣﮑﺮرا ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫رﻣﺰ ‪ 4‬رﻗﻤﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ وارد ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ‪ C/c‬را ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﯽ دﻫﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺧﯿﺮ ‪ 10‬ﻣﯿﻠﯽ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﯾﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﴎﯾﻊ‪ :‬از ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﴎﯾﻊ ﺑﺮای اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زﺑﺎن دﻟﺨﻮاه منﺎﯾﺶ روی‬
‫‪ ENTER 3‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ اﻧﺪازه ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن و ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه اﻋامل ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪا اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﺠﺪد ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت "ﻫامﻫﻨﮓ ﺳﺎزی ﺻﺪا و‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪ :‬ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﴎﯾﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ"‪ ،‬در ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ CLEAR 2‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫دﯾﮕﺮی ﻧﯿﺰ اﯾﺠﺎد ﮐﻨﯿﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(7‬‬
‫*‪ 1‬ﺑﺮای ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﺎدی‪" ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮش" را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﺠﺪد‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت را در "ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ" ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿامت ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮض‬
‫‪ CLEAR‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎز ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮداﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ 2‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ زﯾﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﺰرگ منﺎﺋﯽ)زوم(*‬
‫– ﺳﯿﻨﯽ دﯾﺴﮏ را ﺑﺎز ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫– ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ را ﺗﺎ ﭼﻬﺎر ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ اﻧﺪازه اﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺰرگ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ را‬
‫*‪ 3‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪DVP-SR750HP‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ‪ C/X/x/c‬ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻮارد ﺑﺮای دﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎی داده ﯾﺎ ‪USB‬‬ ‫زاوﯾﻪ‬
‫زاوﯾﻪ را ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎم ﻣﻮرد‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد‬ ‫ﻣﻮرد‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫آﻟﺒﻮم‬
‫ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮای ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ای ﮐﻪ در‬
‫آﻟﺒﻮم ﺣﺎوی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ و ﻋﮑﺲ را ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺎل متﺎﺷﺎی آن ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‪ :‬ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد منﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫دﯾﻨﺎﻣﯿﮏ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ اﻓﺰاﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﱰاﺳﺖ و ﺗﺮاﮐﻢ رﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ را ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫دﯾﻨﺎﻣﯿﮏ ﭘﺮ رﻧﮓ ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫آﻟﺒﻮم‬ ‫ﺳﯿﻨام‪ :‬ﺑﺎ اﻓﺰاﯾﺶ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﯿﺎه ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎت را در ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺗﺎرﯾﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﯾﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫آﻟﺒﻮم ﺣﺎوی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ وﯾﺪﯾﻮ را ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ را ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎت ﺑﯿﺸﱰ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ وﯾﺪﯾﻮ را ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4PR‬‬
 ‫دﯾﺴﮏ‪USB/‬‬
‫"‪ "USB‬ﯾﺎ "دﯾﺴﮏ" ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫منﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﻨﱰل‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ ‪(DVD VIDEO‬‬ ‫از ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﻨﱰل ﺑﺮای اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد و ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﻻ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﻻ را منﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻮ را منﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪REC TO USB‬‬ ‫‪ DISPLAY‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﯾﮏ ‪ CD‬را راﯾﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ و‬
‫ﺑﺮای ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ منﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﻨﱰل‪ ،‬دوﺑﺎره ‪ DISPLAY‬را‬
‫وﯾﺪﯾﻮﯾﯽ را در دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪ USB‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(6‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺻﻠﯽ‪/‬ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻮع ﻋﻨﻮان )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (DVD-VR‬ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ را‬ ‫)‪12(27‬‬ ‫‪PLAY‬‬
‫)‪18(34‬‬ ‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ :‬اﺻﻠﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ وﯾﺮاﯾﺶ ﺷﺪه‪.‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪1:32:55‬‬
‫‪2 ،1‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ* *‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮان‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﯾﺎ آﻫﻨﮓ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺷام ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮاﻫﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t " 1‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ"‪ ،‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﺮده ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫داده و ﻋﻨﻮان )‪ ،(T‬ﺑﺨﺶ )‪ (C‬ﯾﺎ آﻫﻨﮓ )‪ (T‬ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬ ‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫را ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﯾﺰی اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﻨﯿﺪ و ‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻨﻮان‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﯾﺎ آﻫﻨﮓ را ﺗﮑﺮار ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N 3‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2 ،1‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻮارد ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﻨﱰل‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﺎﻣﻨﻈﻢ )‪* *(SHUFFLE‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻋﻨﻮان در ﺣﺎل ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﮐﻞ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻋﻨﺎوﯾﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮان‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﯾﺎ آﻫﻨﮓ را ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ اﺗﻔﺎﻗﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2 ،1‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺑﺨﺶ در ﺣﺎل ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﮐﻞ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻋﻨﺎوﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪PR‬‬ ‫ﺗﮑﺮار* *‬
‫‪ D‬زﻣﺎن ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﻨﺎوﯾﻦ‪/‬آﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬آﻟﺒﻮم ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻋﻨﻮان‪ /‬ﺑﺨﺶ‪/‬‬
‫آﻫﻨﮓ‪ /‬آﻟﺒﻮم‪ /‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﮑﺮر ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ E‬ﻧﻮع رﺳﺎﻧﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫‪2 ،1‬‬
‫ﺗﮑﺮار ‪* *A-B‬‬ ‫‪ F‬وﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ را ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮاﻫﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﮑﺮر ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮد‬ ‫‪ G‬منﺎد ﻣﻮرد اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪/‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ H‬ﭘﯿﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎت‬
‫‪ 1‬در ﻃﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ t " ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ"‪ ،‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﺮده‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ I‬ﻣﻮرد اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﻨﱰل‬
‫‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮار ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ "ﺗﮑﺮار ‪ "A-B‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪ 2‬وﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﴍوع )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ (A‬را ﭘﯿﺪا ﮐﺮدﯾﺪ‪ ENTER ،‬را‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎم ﻣﻮرد‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد‬ ‫ﻣﻮرد‬
‫‪ 3‬وﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎن )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ (B‬رﺳﯿﺪﯾﺪ‪ ،‬دوﺑﺎره ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮان‪/‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪/‬آﻫﻨﮓ‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﱰل واﻟﺪﯾﻦ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻮدک(‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮای ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی از ﭘﺨﺶ روی اﯾﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫آﻫﻨﮓ‬
‫‪ t‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه‪ :‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ از ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻫﺎ را ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮان‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬آﻫﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﯾﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮان ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺳﻄﺢ از ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺷﺪه از ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻦ ﮐﺎرﺑﺮان‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪود ﮐﺮد‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪه ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫زﻣﺎن‪/‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎر‬
‫ﻫﺎی دﯾﮕﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺷﻮد )ﮐﻨﱰل واﻟﺪﯾﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬رﻣﺰ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺪدی ﯾﮏ رﻣﺰ ‪ 4‬رﻗﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺪت ﺳﭙﺮی ﺷﺪه و ﻣﺪت ﺑﺎﻗﯿامﻧﺪه ﭘﺨﺶ را ﺑﺮرﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وارد ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬از اﯾﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺑﺮای ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ دادن رﻣﺰ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ ‫ﮐﺪ زﻣﺎن را ﺑﺮای ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻋﮑﺲ و ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎى‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫وﯾﺪﯾﻮﯾﯽ ‪ DVD‬و‪ Xvid‬را وارد ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪3PR‬‬ ‫اداﻣﻪ‬
 ‫آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﺸﻮر ﻫﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫را ﺑﺮاى ﺣﺪود ﻧﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ روﺷﻦ ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ ‪(DVP-SR750HP‬‬
‫دﯾﮕﺮ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎری ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺎن‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺗﺎ رﻃﻮﺑﺖ آن ﺗﺒﺨري ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫رﻋﺪ و ﺑﺮق‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﱰ از اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬ ‫ﺑﺮاى ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دادن ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزى‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﺗﺤﺖ ﮔﻮ اﻫﻴﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ‬ ‫•‬
‫رﺳﻴﺪه ‪ MPEG-4 VISUAL‬ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم رﻋﺪ و ﺑﺮق‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ وﻗﺘﻰ ﺑﺮاى ﻣﺪت‬ ‫و ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻰ‪ ،‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را در ﺑﺎران ﻳﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺨﴡ و ﻏري ﺗﺠﺎرى ﻣﴫف‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻻىن منﻰ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ از آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎى ﻣﺮﻃﻮب ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺮاى دﻳﻜﺪ ﻛﺮدن وﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺑﻪ روﳽ‬ ‫آن را از ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر از آﺳﻴﺒﻬﺎى‬ ‫ﺑﺮاى ﺟﻠﻮﮔريى از ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻰ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺎز ﮔﺎر ﺑﺎ ‪MPEG-4 VISUAL‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﳽ از رﻋﺪ و ﺑﺮق و ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﺮق‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﺑﺎز ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را ﺑﻪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد )"‪("MPEG-4 VIDEO‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔريى ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫اﻓﺮاد ﻛﺎرآزﻣﻮده واﮔﺬار منﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﴫف ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻰ از ﺳﻮى ﴎوﻳﺴﻜﺎر‬
‫ﻣﻀﻤﻮن ﺷﺨﴡ ﻳﺎ ﻏري ﺗﺠﺎرى ﻛﺪﮔﺬارى‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺎىت درﺑﺎره دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫از دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎى زﻳﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﱪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺪه و‪/‬ﻳﺎ از ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺠﺎز‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻳﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻳﻬﺎى داﺧﻞ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را‬
‫وﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ MPEG LA‬ﺑﺮ اى ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬ ‫– دﻳﺴىك ﻛﻪ داراى ﺷﻜﻞ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎرت‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﺐ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﮔﺮﻣﺎى زﻳﺎد ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻮر‬
‫‪ MPEG-4 VIDEO‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آﻣﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻮع ﻣﺠﻮز دﻳﮕﺮى ﺑﺮاى ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬ ‫– دﻳﺴىك ﻛﻪ داراى ﻣﺎرك ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻮرﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬آﺗﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ آن ﻗﺮار داد‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﺎﮔﺎر اﻧﺘﻰ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺷﻮد وﻛﺎرﺑﺮدى‬ ‫ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺪارد‪ .‬اﻃﻼ ﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺮوش‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎرف داﺧﻠﻰ و ﺗﺠﺎرى و اﺧﺬ ﻣﺠﻮز‬ ‫رﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫را ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮ اﻧﻴﺪ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪،MPEG LA‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷام داراى ﻳﻚ رﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫‪ LCC‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آورﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫اى ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﭘﺸﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ http://www.mpegla.com‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺎى ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫درﺑﺎزارى )ﻓﻘﻂ ﭘﺨﺶ( راﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ روى‬ ‫اﯾﻦ وﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺤﺼﻮل دﺳﺘﻪ ‪1‬‬
‫آﻧﻬﺎ رﻣﺰﻫﺎى ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ اى را ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮده‬ ‫ﻟﯿﺰری )‪ (CLASS 1 LASER‬ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫درﺑﺎره اﻳﻦ دﻓﱰﭼﻪ راﻫﻨام‬ ‫اﺳﺖ را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻰ منﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬از اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل درﺟﻪ ‪ 1‬ﻟﯿﺰری‬
‫اﺻﻄﻼح "‪ "DVD‬ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﲆ ﺑﺮاى ﻛﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺮاى ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺣﻖ ﭘﺨﺶ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫در ﻋﻘﺐ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎرﺟﯽ ﻗﺮار دارد‪.‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻫﺎى ﻣﻌﻤﻮﱃ‪DVD+RW ،‬‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻫﺎى ﻣﻌﻤﻮﱃ داراى ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ‬ ‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎط‬
‫ﻫﺎ‪ DVD+R/‬ﻫﺎ‪ DVD+R DL/‬ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺎدر ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﻮرى ﺑﻜﺎر رﻓﺘﻪ در اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (+VR‬و ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻫﺎ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸامن ﺷام آﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻰ رﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬از‬
‫‪ DVD-R‬ﻫﺎ‪ DVD-R DL /‬ﻫﺎ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫آﻧﺠﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ اﺷﻌﻪ ﻟﻴﺰر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ ،VR‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯨﺮى( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻰ از ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺎى ﻣﻌﻤﻮﱃ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ رﻣﺰ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪ CD/DVD‬ﺑﺮاى ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﴬ‬
‫آرم ﻫﺎی "‪ "HDMI‬و "‪PhotoTV‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ اى ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬اﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﺑﺎز ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ "HD‬روی ﺟﻠﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮای ‪DVP-‬‬
‫ﻫﺎى ﻣﻌﻤﻮﱃ از ﺳﻮى ﺑﺮﺧﻰ از ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را ﺑﻪ اﻓﺮاد ﻛﺎرآزﻣﻮده واﮔﺬار منﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ SR750HP‬ﮐﺎرﺑﺮد دارﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪود ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻬﺎى ﻻزم‬
‫‪00V 00Hz‬‬
‫‪DVP–XXXX‬‬

‫‪X‬‬ ‫رﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ اى‬ ‫ﺑﺮاى ﺟﻠﻮﮔريى از ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزى و‬ ‫•‬
‫‪NO.‬‬
‫‪00W‬‬
‫ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻰ‪ ،‬اﺷﻴﺎء داراى ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫‪0-000-000-00‬‬
‫ﮔﻠﺪان‪ ،‬را روى دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮق وﺻﻞ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺣﻖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻨﻮز از ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧريو ‪) AC‬ﺑﺮق( ﺟﺪا‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺠﻮز ﻻﺑﺮ اﺗﻮار‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ اﮔﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬
‫داﻟﺒﻰ‪ .‬داﻟﺒﻰ و ﻧﺸﺎن ‪ double-D‬ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎى‬ ‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎرى ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻻﺑﺮ اﺗﻮار داﻟﺒﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﭘﺨﺶ را در ﻓﻀﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫•‬
‫"‪،"DVD-RW" ،"DVD+RW‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﻛﺘﺎب ﻳﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫"‪،"DVD+R DL" ،"DVD+R‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ "DVD VIDEO" ،"DVD-R‬و‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﭘﺨﺶ را در ﻧﺰدﻳىك ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮق‬ ‫•‬
‫"‪ "CD‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎرى ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ در ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ اﺿﻄﺮارى ﺑﺘﻮان‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژى ﻛﺪﮔﺬارى ﺻﻮىت ‪MPEG‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق ‪) AC‬ﺳﻴﻢ اﺻﲆ( را ﺑﴪﻋﺖ‬
‫‪ Layer-3‬وداراى ﻣﺠﻮز ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪه از‬ ‫از ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻛﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Fraunhofer IIS‬و ‪.Thomson‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴام از ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﴎد‬ ‫•‬
‫اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژى ‪High‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﮔﺮم ﺑﺮده ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ در اﻃﺎﻗﻰ‬
‫‪Definition Multimedia Interface‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬رﻃﻮﺑﺖ‬
‫)™‪ (HDMI‬ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،HDMI .‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮ روى ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎى داﺧﻞ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻰ‬
‫آرم ‪ HDMI‬و ‪High-Definition‬‬ ‫ﺷﻮد‪ .‬اﮔﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ اﺗﻔﺎق اﻓﺘﺪ‪ ،‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫‪ Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎرى‬ ‫ﺑﻪ درﺳﺘﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪ .‬در اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎرى ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪه از ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬دﻳﺴﻚ را ﺧﺎرج ﻛﺮده و دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫‪ Licensing LLC‬در اﻳﺎﻻت ﻣﺘﺤﺪه‬
‫‪2PR‬‬
 ‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ رﻣﻮز اﻟﻠﻐﺎت‬
7 ‫! اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬

Samoan 1507 Maori 1347 Irish 1183 Afar 1027
Shona 1508 Macedonian 1349 Scots Gaelic 1186 Abkhazian 1028
Somali 1509 Malayalam 1350 Galician 1194 Afrikaans 1032
Albanian 1511 Mongolian 1352 Guarani 1196 Amharic 1039
Serbian 1512 Moldavian 1353 Gujarati 1203 Arabic 1044
Siswati 1513 Marathi 1356 Hausa 1209 Assamese 1045
Sesotho 1514 Malay 1357 Hindi 1217 Aymara 1051
Sundanese 1515 Maltese 1358 Croatian 1226 Azerbaijani 1052
Swedish 1516 Burmese 1363 Hungarian 1229 Bashkir 1053
Swahili 1517 Nauru 1365 Armenian 1233 Byelorussian 1057
Tamil 1521 Nepali 1369 Interlingua 1235 Bulgarian 1059
Telugu 1525 Dutch 1376 Interlingue 1239 Bihari 1060
Tajik 1527 Norwegian 1379 Inupiak 1245 Bislama 1061
Thai 1528 Occitan 1393 Indonesian 1248 Bengali; 1066
Tigrinya 1529 (Afan)Oromo 1403 Icelandic 1253 Bangla
Turkmen 1531 Oriya 1408 Italian 1254 Tibetan 1067
Tagalog 1532 Punjabi 1417 Hebrew 1257 Breton 1070
Setswana 1534 Polish 1428 Japanese 1261 Catalan 1079
Tonga 1535 Pashto; 1435 Yiddish 1269 Corsican 1093
Turkish 1538 Pushto Javanese 1283 Czech 1097
Tsonga 1539 Portuguese 1436 Georgian 1287 Welsh 1103
Tatar 1540 Quechua 1463 Kazakh 1297 Danish 1105
Twi 1543 -Rhaeto 1481 Greenlandic 1298 German 1109
Ukrainian 1557 Romance Cambodian 1299 Bhutani 1130
Urdu 1564 Kirundi 1482 Kannada 1300 Greek 1142
Uzbek 1572 Romanian 1483 Korean 1301 English 1144
Vietnamese 1581 Russian 1489 Kashmiri 1305 Esperanto 1145
Volapük 1587 Kinyarwanda 1491 Kurdish 1307 Spanish 1149
Wolof 1613 Sanskrit 1495 Kirghiz 1311 Estonian 1150
Xhosa 1632 Sindhi 1498 Latin 1313 Basque 1151
Yoruba 1665 Sangho 1501 Lingala 1326 Persian 1157
Chinese 1684 -Serbo 1502 Laothian 1327 Finnish 1165
Zulu 1697 Croatian Lithuanian 1332 Fiji 1166
Singhalese 1503 Latvian; 1334 Faroese 1171
Slovak 1505 Lettish French 1174
‫ﻏري ﻣﺤﺪّد‬ 1703 Slovenian 1506 Malagasy 1345 Frisian 1181
1988 (E/F) ‫ ﻗﻴﺎﳼ‬:ISO 639

‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ رﻣﻮز ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ‬

3 ‫! اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬

Spain 2149 Mexico 2362 Finland 2165 Argentina 2044
Sweden 2499 Netherlands 2376 France 2174 Australia 2047
Switzerland 2086 New Zealand 2390 Germany 2109 Austria 2046
Thailand 2528 Norway 2379 India 2248 Belgium 2057
United 2184 Pakistan 2427 Indonesia 2238 Brazil 2070
Kingdom Philippines 2424 Italy 2254 Canada 2079
Portugal 2436 Japan 2276 Chile 2090
Russia 2489 Korea 2304 China 2092
Singapore 2501 Malaysia 2363 Denmark 2115
 ‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻠﻴﺰر‪ :‬ﻟﻴﺰر ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫اﻹدﺧﺎل‪/‬اﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎت‬
‫)‪ :AUDIO OUT (L/R‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻮﻧﻮ‬ ‫•‬
‫)‪ :DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻮﻧﻮ‬ ‫•‬
‫)‪:COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y, PB, PR‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫‪ :VIDEO OUT‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻮﻧﻮ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪) HDMI OUT‬اﻟﻄﺮاز ‪ DVP-SR750HP‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻗﻴﺎﳼ ذو ‪ 19‬ﺳﻨًﺎ‬
‫‪ :USB‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮع أ‪ ،‬اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷﻗﴡ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎر ‪500‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﲇ أﻣﺒري )ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺰ ‪(USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎت اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ 240-110 :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﱰدد‪60/50 ،‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻬﻼك اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ 10‬واط )اﻟﻄﺮاز ‪(DVP-SR520P‬‬
‫‪ 12‬واط )اﻟﻄﺮاز ‪(DVP-SR750HP‬‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ(‪ 209 × 38.5 × 320 :‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫•‬
‫)اﻟﻌﺮض‪/‬اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬اﻟﻌﻤﻖ( مبﺎ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ اﻷﺟﺰاء اﻟﺒﺎرزة‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ(‪ 1.1 :‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫•‬
‫درﺟﺔ اﻟﺤﺮارة أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 5 :‬درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ إﱃ ‪ 35‬درﺟﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ % 25 :‬إﱃ ‪% 80‬‬ ‫•‬

‫اﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎت اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻮﻧﻮ × ‪ y 3‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻮﻧﻮ‬ ‫•‬
‫× ‪(1) (3‬‬
‫وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪(1‬‬ ‫•‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺘﺎن ﻃﺮاز ‪) R6‬ﺣﺠﻢ ‪(2) (AA‬‬
‫• ﺳﻠﻚ ‪) (1) HDMI‬اﻟﻄﺮاز ‪ DVP-SR750HP‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬

‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت واﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴري دون إﺷﻌﺎر ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬

‫‪11AR‬‬
 ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻏري اﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪MPEG-‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض‬
‫‪ ،4‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج أي ﳾء ﺳﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪) MPEG-1 :‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ‪MPEG-4/(Cyber-shot‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮل اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ(*‪Xvid/1‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬا‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ‪) JPEG :‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪(DCF‬‬
‫اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ أو ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أو ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪) MP3 :‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪) WMA/(mp3PRO‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ وﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﱰﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪WAVE/LPCM/2* ،1*AAC/2* ،1*(WMA Pro‬‬
‫إذا مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺘﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫وأﻳﻀﺎ ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﴩ )إدارة‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DATA‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ إﻧﺸﺎؤﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪Packet‬‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻘﻮق اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.Write‬‬ ‫*‪ 2‬ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮم اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻌﺮض اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺮﻣﺰة‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.Lossless‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﺬي ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ أن ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫اﻻﻣﺘﺪادات اﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪،".mpeg" ،".mpg" ،".avi" :‬‬
‫"‪".wav" ،".m4a" ،".wma" ،".mp3" ،".jpg" ،".mp4‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﺣامﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ اﻟﻨﴩ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﺣامﻳﺔ ‪CPRM‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪،DVD±RW/±R/±R DL ،DVD :‬‬
‫‪CD-R/-RW ،Music CD/Super VCD‬‬
‫)ﺣامﻳﺔ اﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﰲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫‪.DVD-VR‬‬ ‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DATA CD‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ISO 9660‬‬ ‫•‬
‫اﳌﺴﺘﻮى اﻷول‪/‬اﳌﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺜﺎين‪ ،‬أو اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﳌﻤﺘﺪ اﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬و‪VIDEO‬‬ ‫‪.Joliet‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬ ‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DATA DVD‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪.UDF‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻋﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬و‪VIDEO‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮم اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أي ﻣﻦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة أﻋﻼه‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ CD‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﺼﻮد ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻲ اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ‪ .‬مبﺎ أن‬ ‫إذا اﺧﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﳌﻠﻒ‪ .‬ميﻜﻦ أن ﻳﺆدي ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻳﻌﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬و‪ VIDEO CD‬وﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت إﱃ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ميﻜﻦ أن ﺗﺆدي إﱃ اﻹﴐار‬
‫ﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺻﻤﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻲ اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺰاﻳﺎ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ً .‬‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ارﺟﻊ إﱃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ميﻜﻦ أن ﻳﺤﺘﺎج ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺪرج ﻣﻦ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻣﻊ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬أو ‪.VIDEO CD‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ إﱃ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﺬا‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎت‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳني ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺪرج‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮل اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ واﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻌﺮض اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر‬ ‫واﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﲆ ﻇﺮوف اﻟﱰﻣﻴﺰ‪/‬اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ )‪ .(CD‬اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻮﺟﻪ وﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺪء اﻟﻌﺮض واﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﱃ أﻟﺒﻮم‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ آﺧﺮ أو ﺗﺎلٍ‬ ‫•‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ اﳌﺸﻔﺮة ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎت ﺣامﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﴩ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ )‪ .(CD‬وﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮف اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﲆ ‪ 200‬أﻟﺒﻮم ﻭ‪ 600‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺤﺪ أﻗﴡ‪ .‬ﻛام‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻫﺬه اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ميﻜﻨﻪ اﻟﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﲆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 300‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ و‪300‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮر ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر "ﺻﻮرة )ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ("‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ اﻷﻟﺒﻮم‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮم اﳌﺸﻐﻞ مبﺴﺢ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻏري‬ ‫•‬
‫اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻗﺎمئﺔ أﻟﺒﻮم ﰲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺗﺘﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ أو أﻛرث‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ أﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ‪720‬‬ ‫•‬
‫)ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 576‬ارﺗﻔﺎع(‪/‬أو ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﺎ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻌﺮض ً‬ ‫•‬
‫مبﻌﺪل ﺑﺖ أﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ أﻻ ﻳﻘﻮم اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ذي ﻣﻌﺪل‬ ‫•‬
‫اﻟﺒﺖ اﳌﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DATA CD‬ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﻧﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪.DATA DVD‬‬

‫‪10AR‬‬
 ‫‪ C‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ مل ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫اﺧﺘﺘﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء اﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺟﻌﻞ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎف اﻷﺧﻄﺎء وإﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏري ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺎين ﻣﻦ أي ﻣﻦ اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪم دﻟﻴﻞ اﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎف اﻷﺧﻄﺎء وإﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻫﺬا‬
‫"‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ درج اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت وﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة ﰲ ﺣﻞ اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ اﻹﺻﻼح‪ .‬إذا اﺳﺘﻤﺮت‬
‫)‪ (LOCKED‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎرة أﻗﺮب ﻣﻮزع ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺿﺪ ﻋﺒﺚ اﻷﻃﻔﺎل )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(5‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ درج اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت وﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة "‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ﻳﻜﻮن ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻣﻮﺻ ًﻼ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (TRAY LOCKED‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎرة ﻣﻮزع ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ أو ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ‪Sony‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮرة‪/‬أو ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ C‬أﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬أﺳﻼك اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "C13‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ C‬اﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز وﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺪد اﳌﺪﺧﻼت‬
‫‪ C‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗامش ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ أو ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻹﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴري ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان ﰲ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(5‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "C31‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ C‬اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ أو ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬أﻋﺪ إدﺧﺎل اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ C‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ [/1‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬وأدﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮر‪/‬ﺻﻮت ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ مبﻘﺒﺲ ‪.HDMI OUT‬‬ ‫"‪ "369‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫)اﻟﻄﺮاز ‪ DVP-SR750HP‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ [/1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺮة‬
‫‪ C‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴري اﻹﻋﺪاد " ‪ HDMI‬ﻧﻘﺎوة" ﰲ "‪ HDMI‬إﻋﺪاد"‪.‬‬ ‫أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ أن ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI OUT‬ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪ C‬أﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﰲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر "ﺻﻮت‬ ‫‪ C‬أﺳﻼك اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ "(HDMI‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ " ‪ HDMI‬إﻋﺪاد" ﻋﲆ "‪."PCM‬‬ ‫‪ C‬اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ أو ﻋﲆ وﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ C‬ﺣﺎول ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻻﺟﺮاءات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ 1 :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺸﻐﻞ وأﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪ 2 .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ C‬اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ وﺿﻊ اﻟﱰﺟﻴﻊ اﻟﴪﻳﻊ أو اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻞ وأﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪ 3 .‬اﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬وأﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ C‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم ﺑﺎﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺗﺎﻟﻒ أو اﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ إﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ اﻹﺷﺎرات‬
‫‪ C‬مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ وﺿﻊ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ إﱃ وﺿﻊ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫اﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻷزرار‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ﺧﻼل ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮانٍ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮن وﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻠﺘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺗﺮاﻛﻤﺖ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ داﺧﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪9AR‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
 ‫ﺻﻮت )‪ :(HDMI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرة ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫رﻗﻤﻲ ﺧﺎرج‪ :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ .HDMI OUT‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪.DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT‬‬
‫"‪ "PCM‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ﺗﻠﻔﺎز ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎرات "‪DOLBY‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ"‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﻊ إﺷﺎرات ‪.MPEG/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL‬‬ ‫‪ "DIGITAL‬أو "‪ "MPEG‬أو "‪ "DTS‬أو‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫"‪."48kHz/96kHz PCM‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر "‪ t‬أﺧﺮى"‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد وأدﺧﻞ رﻣﺰًا ﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫*‬
‫‪ :DOLBY DIGITAL‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرة ‪Dolby‬‬
‫ارﺟﻊ إﱃ "ﻗﺎمئﺔ رﻣﻮز اﻟﻠﻐﺎت" ﰲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ أو ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫*‬ ‫‪ .Digital‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﲆ "ﺧﻠﻂ ﺗﻨﺎزﱄ )‪"(D-PCM‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ [/1‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ مبﻜﻮن ﺻﻮت دون ﺟﻬﺎز ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔري‬
‫اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬وأدﺧﻞ "‪ "369‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ [/1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ Dolby Digital‬ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :MPEG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرة ﺻﻮت ‪ .MPEG‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ DVP-SR750HP‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫*‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﲆ "‪ "MPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ مبﻜﻮن‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ اﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺻﻮت ﻣﻊ وﺟﻮد ﺟﻬﺎز ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔري ‪ MPEG‬ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪.AUDIO OUT L/R‬‬ ‫‪ :DTS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرة ﺻﻮت ‪ .DTS‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‬
‫– ﻣﻘﺒﺲ )‪HDMI/DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ OUT‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪"DOLBY DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪ VIDEO‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺎرات ﺻﻮت ‪ .DTS‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﲆ "ﺧﻠﻂ ﺗﻨﺎزﱄ )‪."(D-PCM‬‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﲆ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫مبﻜﻮن ﺻﻮت دون وﺟﻮد ﺟﻬﺎز ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔري ‪.DTS‬‬
‫‪ :48kHz/96kHz PCM‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺗﺮدد اﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻹﺷﺎرة‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ DVD VIDEO) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬إﻋﺪاد*‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎل ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻧﻘﺎوة*‪ :2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرة ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ .HDMI OUT‬إذا ﺗﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫"ﺗﻠﻘﺎيئ)‪) "(1920×1080p‬اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮن ذات أﻋﲆ دﻗﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻏري واﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬أو ﻏري‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬أو ﻻ ﺗﺮﺿﻴﻚ ﺑﺄي ﺷﻜﻞ آﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠﺮب ﺧﻴﺎ ًرا آﺧﺮ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬أو ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪/‬أو اﻟﻌﺮض أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮف‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ارﺟﻊ ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ إﱃ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴامت‬
‫اﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ "ﻧﻘﺎوة اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫‪ "JPEG‬ﻋﲆ "‪."PhotoTV HD‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎوة اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ :JPEG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع دﻗﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ميﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺠﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﺗﺼﺎل ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﻀﺒﻂ "ﻧﻮع‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن" ﻋﲆ "‪ ."16:9‬ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ " ‪ HDMI‬ﻧﻘﺎوة" ﻋﲆ "‪."720×480/576p‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺨﻴﺎران ")‪ " HD (1920×1080i‬و"‪HD‬‬
‫)‪ "(1920×1080i‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟني ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‬
‫" ‪ HDMI‬ﻧﻘﺎوة" ﻋﲆ "‪ ."1920×1080i‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﲆ "‪ ،"PhotoTV HD‬أو "‪HD‬‬
‫)‪ "(1920×1080i‬أو ")‪ ،"HD (1920×1080i‬ﻓﺈن وﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺄﺛري واﻟﺘﺪوﻳﺮ واﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ :YCBCR/RGB (HDMI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرة ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎت‬
‫‪ HDMI‬اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﲆ "‪ "RGB‬إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ "ﻧﻘﺎوة‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ "JPEG‬ﻋﲆ "‪."PhotoTV HD‬‬
‫‪8AR‬‬
 ‫اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻮن اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ أو ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﳌﺮاد ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﺷﺨﴢ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ .‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ "ﺻﻮرة ﻣﺤﻔﻈﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص"‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ أن اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮرة ﻏﻼف‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة "اﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎت"‪.‬‬ ‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ إﻋﺪادات ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ )‪ :2*(COMPONENT OUT ONLY‬اﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء وﺟﻮد اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﰲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻋﲆ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" إذا ﻛﺎن ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ إﺷﺎرات‬ ‫)اﻹﻋﺪاد(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﱰ "ﺷﺨﴢ"‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬واﺧﱰ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬وﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ"‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ "ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﺷﺨﴢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ "(PROGRESSIVE‬و"ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ‪."4:3‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ )‪ : (PROGRESSIVE‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر "ﺗﻠﻘﺎيئ"‪،‬‬ ‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺈن اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ أو اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ ووﻇﻴﻔﺘﻪ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻨﴫ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬وﻳﺆدي إﱃ اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ إﱃ اﻹﺻﺪار اﳌﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ‪ :4:3‬ﻳﻜﻮن ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم‬ ‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ "ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن" ﻋﲆ "‪ ."16:9‬اﺧﱰ "ﻛﺎﻣﻞ" ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع إﱃ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد ﺷﺨﴢ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ*‪ :1‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ )‪DVD‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد اﻵﱄ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أو إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﻋﺪاد اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‬ ‫‪ VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎيئ‪ .‬إذا اﺧﱰت "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ"‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت*‪ :1‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴري اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ مبﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﱰك ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﳌﺪة ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﲆ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫"أﺻﲇ"‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﰲ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎيئ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪأ‬ ‫)‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎيئ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ*‪ :1‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ )ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .DVD VIDEO‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر "اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ"‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐري‬
‫منﻂ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﻴﻨام ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺟامت وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻫﺎ ﳌﺴﺎر‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬اﺧﱰ "ﺗﻠﻘﺎيئ" ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪ DVD VIDEO) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر "إﻃﺎر"‪ DVD) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫إﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر‪ :‬ﻹﻋﻄﺎء اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪ :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع إﱃ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫أﻋﲆ ﻋﺪد ﻗﻨﻮات ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻎ ﺻﻮت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة )ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ PCM‬أو ﺻﻮت‬
‫‪ MPEG‬أو ‪ DTS‬أو ‪ .(Dolby Digital‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬
‫"ﺗﻠﻘﺎيئ"‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ DVD VIDEO) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة*‪ :3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر أوﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮر ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻮدة أو اﻟﴪﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻗﺮص ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ‪ -‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أو إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﻋﺪاد‬ ‫ﻋﺮض منﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ‪4:3‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻗﺮص ﻣﺘﻌﺪد‪ .‬ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬
‫ﻟﻌﺪد ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 6‬أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DVD VIDEO/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪ .CD‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف‪DVD VIDEO/VIDEO CD) .‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض منﻂ واﺳﻊ ‪4:3‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﻠﻮن )‪ :(VIDEO CD‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت )‪ :4*(DRC‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ .VIDEO CD‬إذا ﻛﺎن ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز اﻟﺨﺎص‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﲆ "منﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﻚ ﻣﺰودًا ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺜﻨﺎيئ ‪ ،DUAL‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر "ﺗﻠﻘﺎيئ"‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن" ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺬر متﻴﻴﺰ أدق اﻷﺻﻮات‪ ،‬أو ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ وﺿﻊ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ"‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﲆ "ﻣﺠﺎل واﺳﻊ" ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﺑﻴﺌﺔ اﻻﺳﺘامع ﺟﻴﺪة‪،‬‬ ‫اﻟﺤامﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺆﻗﺖ أو‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﰲ ﻣﴪح ﻣﻨﺰﱄ ﻟﻸﻓﻼم‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﳌﺪة ‪ 15‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ N‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫إﺷﺎرة دوﻟﺒﻲ*‪ :4‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴري أﺳﻠﻮب اﻟﺨﻠﻂ إﱃ ﻗﻨﺎﺗني ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺤامﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﻋﻨﺎﴏ ﺻﻮت ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻗﻨﻮات(‪ ،‬أو اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .Dolby Digital‬اﺧﱰ‬
‫"دوﻟﺒﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ" ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪,‬‬
‫‪7AR‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ C/X/x/c‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎت أو اﳌﺴﺎرات‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫أرﻗﺎم رﻣﺰ أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز اﻟﺘﻲ ميﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫أو اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫‪) 01‬اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ(‬ ‫‪Sony‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎت أو اﳌﺴﺎرات أو اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﴍ‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪Hitachi‬‬
‫‪.REC LED‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪JVC‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻋﺪد اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎت أو اﳌﺴﺎرات أو اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺤﺪدة‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫‪LG/Goldstar‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪49 ،17‬‬ ‫‪Panasonic‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪.N‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪72 ،08 ،06‬‬ ‫‪Philips‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬أو ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪ REC LED‬ﰲ اﻹﺿﺎءة‪.‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪Sharp‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪأ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺗﻘﺪم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪Toshiba‬‬
‫اﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض "إﻧﺘﻬﻰ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻨﺠﺎح"‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻋﺮوض اﻟﴩاﺋﺢ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺠﻮدة‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫)‪(PhotoTV HD‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬أو ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ زر ‪ .REC TO USB‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫)اﻟﻄﺮاز ‪ DVP-SR750HP‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻋﲆ زر ‪ ،REC TO USB‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎن ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻔﺎز ﻣﻦ إﻧﺘﺎج ﴍﻛﺔ ﺳﻮين ‪ Sony‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ N‬ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪأ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ "‪ ،"PhotoTV HD‬ميﻜﻦ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮر ذات‬
‫أﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮدة‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ "‪ "PhotoTV HD‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﳌﺴﺢ "أﻟﺒﻮم" أو "اﳌﺴﺎر" أو "ﻣﻠﻒ"‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬وﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ .CLEAR‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ "ﻧﻘﺎوة اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ "JPEG‬ﰲ "‪ HDMI‬إﻋﺪاد" ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫"‪) "PhotoTV HD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8‬‬
‫ﻹزاﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬أو ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫أوﻗﻒ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬أو ﻧﺴﺦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،CD‬أو ﻧﺴﺦ‪/‬إزاﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ .USB‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻷن ذﻟﻚ ميﻜﻦ أن ﻳﺆدي إﱃ‬ ‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬أو ﻧﺴﺦ* ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .USB‬ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬أو ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري رﻗﻢ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ )‪(LUN‬‬ ‫* وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺮص‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬر اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‪ ،‬ميﻜﻦ أن ﻳﻈﻬﺮ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪REC LED‬‬
‫)‪ .(LUN‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴري رﻗﻢ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ أو اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻷﺻﲇ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎت أو‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺎرات‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺒﺬة ﻋﻦ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬اﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ USB Mass Storage Class‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ذات ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪FAT‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪REC TO USB‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ درج اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬إﱃ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪.USB‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر "‪."REC TO USB‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ X/x‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬اﺧﱰ "ﻗﺮص" أو "اﳌﺴﺎر"‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪ ،‬اﺧﱰ "ﻗﺮص" أو "أﻟﺒﻮم" أو‬
‫"اﳌﺴﺎر" أو "ﻣﻠﻒ"‪.‬‬
‫إذا اﺧﱰت "ﻗﺮص"‪ ،‬ﻓﺎذﻫﺐ إﱃ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪.6‬‬

‫‪6AR‬‬
 ‫ﻟﻌﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD‬اﳌﺰودة‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة )‪(PBC‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮرة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌامل ﻛﺎﻣريا‬
‫رﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺒﺪء ﻋﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ VIDEO CD‬اﳌﺰودة‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫اﳌﺪة*‬
‫ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة )‪ ،(PBC‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻔﱰة اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺮض اﻟﴩاﺋﺢ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺄﺛري*‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮض ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫)‪(PBC‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﺛﺮات اﳌﺮاد اﺳﺘﻌامﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻴري اﻟﴩاﺋﺢ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ >‪ ./‬أو أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﴩاﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺴﺎر‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ N‬أو‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ :1‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻇﻬﺎر اﻟﺼﻮر ﻣﻊ اﳌﺆﺛﺮات ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .ENTER‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ :2‬ﺗﺘﺤﺮك اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻦ أﻋﲆ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر إﱃ أﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﻴﻤني‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة )‪ ،(PBC‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ x‬ﻣﺮﺗني‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ :3‬ﺗﺘﺤﺮك اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻦ أﻋﲆ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪.N‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ :4‬ﺗﺘﺤﺮك اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر إﱃ اﻟﻴﻤني‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ :5‬ﺗﺘﻤﺪد اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إﻏﻼق‪ :‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻔﻞ درج اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت )اﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺿﺪ ﻋﺒﺚ‬
‫وﺳﻴﻠﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻃﻔﺎل(‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ درج اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ دون ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻷزرار‬ ‫ﺻﻮرة )ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ وﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﰲ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪RETURN O‬‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺮض ﴍاﺋﺢ‪ .‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻋﺮض‬
‫و‪ ENTER‬و‪.[/1‬‬ ‫اﻟﴩاﺋﺢ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ وﺿﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ واﻟﺼﻮر‬
‫" )‪(LOCKED‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ وﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻷﻟﺒﻮم‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎن وﻗﺖ ﻋﺮض اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺰر ‪ Z‬إﱃ أن ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫أو اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ أﻃﻮل‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ اﻷﻃﻮل دون ﺻﻮت أو‬
‫اﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺿﺪ ﻋﺒﺚ اﻷﻃﻔﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ درج اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫ﺻﻮرة )‪ :2*(BGM‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻷزرار‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮر ﺻﻮت اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﺧﲇ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﰲ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪RETURN O‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ AUDIO‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض‬
‫و‪ ENTER‬و‪.\/1‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮرة*‪ :3‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ وﺣﺪة‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ SUBTITLE‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻏري ﻣﺘﺰاﻣﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬وﻣﺼﺪر اﳌﺪﺧﻼت‪ ،‬وﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ MP3 ID3‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻣﻦ إﻧﺘﺎج ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ Sony‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل وﺣﺪة‬ ‫*‪ 1‬وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ DVP-SR750HP 2‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺪرﺟﺎ ﰲ اﻟﺠﺪول اﳌﻮﺟﻮد‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ ً‬
‫*‪ DVP-SR520HP 3‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫أدﻧﺎه‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ رﻣﺰ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪال اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫إذا مل ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ ،TV [/1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴري ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻟﻴﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎم‬
‫أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻣﺰ ﻣﺼﻨﻊ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻷﻟﻮان ﰲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز )‪ NTSC‬أو ‪.(PAL‬‬
‫ﺣﺮر اﻟﺰر ‪.TV [/1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ أوﻻً ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.[/1‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،DISPLAY‬وأدﺧﻞ "‪ "0‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أزرار‬
‫اﻷرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ [/1‬ﻋﲆ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪ ،‬وﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﺳﻢ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪,‬‬
‫‪5AR‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
 ‫ﺣﺪة اﻟﻮﺿﻮح‬ ‫‪ t‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫زﻳﺎدة اﳌﺨﻄﻂ اﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﲇ ﻟﻠﺼﻮرة ﻹﻧﺘﺎج ﺻﻮرة أﻛرث ﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ أرﺑﻌﺔ أرﻗﺎم ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪ ًﻣﺎ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم‪ً .‬‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬه‬
‫إﻏﻼق‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﻟﺘﺤﺴني اﳌﺨﻄﻂ اﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﲇ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ )اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺤﺪود(‬
‫‪ :2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺴني اﳌﺨﻄﻂ اﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﲇ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ أﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪.1‬‬ ‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻗﻴﻮد ﻟﻠﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﺰاﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻮت واﻟﺼﻮرة*‬ ‫‪ 1‬اﺧﱰ "‪ t‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ"‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل أو إﻋﺎدة إدﺧﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ أرﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧري ﺑني اﻟﺼﻮرة واﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫أرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ X/x‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر "ﻗﻴﺎﳼ"‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳌﻘﺒﺲ )‪،DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL‬‬ ‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫وﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "DOLBY DIGITAL‬أو "‪"MPEG‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ X/x‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫أو "‪ "DTS‬ﰲ "إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺼﻮت" ﻋﲆ "‪DOLBY‬‬ ‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ "DIGITAL‬أو "‪ "MPEG‬أو "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻮاﱄ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪد " ‪ t‬أﺧﺮى"‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد وأدﺧﻞ رﻣﺰًا ﻗﻴﺎﺳ ًﻴﺎ‪ .‬ارﺟﻊ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8‬‬ ‫إﱃ "ﻗﺎمئﺔ رﻣﻮز ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ" ﰲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Dolby Digital‬أو ﺟﻬﺎز ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪ 3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ X/x‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر "اﳌﺴﺘﻮى"‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ DTS‬ﻋﱪ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬وﺿﺒﻂ "‪DOLBY‬‬ ‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ "DIGITAL‬أو "‪ "MPEG‬أو "‪ "DTS‬ﰲ "إﻋﺪاد‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ X/x‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺴﺘﻮى‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت" ﻋﲆ "‪ "DOLBY DIGITAL‬أو "‪ "MPEG‬أو‬ ‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫"ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻮاﱄ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺧﱰ "‪ t‬إﺧﺘﻴﺎر"‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠام أﺻﺒﺤﺖ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ أﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠام أﺻﺒﺤﺖ اﻟﻘﻴﻮد أﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﴍﻳﻂ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ "ﺗﺰاﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻮت واﻟﺼﻮرة"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ "اﳌﺴﺘﻮى"‬
‫‪ 2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ c‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﲆ "إﻏﻼق"‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻘﻮم ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،C/c‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﺮ‬ ‫إذا ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄدﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪"199703‬‬
‫مبﻘﺪار ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﻠﲇ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،ENTER‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ 3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ أرﺑﻌﺔ أرﻗﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺄﺛري اﻹﻋﺪاد اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺗﻌﻴني اﻹﻋﺪاد "ﺗﺰاﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻮت واﻟﺼﻮرة"‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ CLEAR‬ﰲ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﴎﻳﻊ‪ :‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪ Quick Setup‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬وﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع إﱃ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫*‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪ ،‬اﺧﱰ "إﻏﻼق" أو اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن وإﺷﺎرة ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪.CLEAR‬‬ ‫ﺷﺨﴢ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إﱃ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪،Quick Setup‬‬
‫*‪ 2‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﰲ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫– ﻓﺘﺢ درج اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺪادات أﺧﺮى ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(7‬‬
‫– إﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎدة اﻹﻋﺪادات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ "اﻹﻋﺪاد"‬
‫*‪ DVP-SR750HP 3‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫إﱃ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DATA‬أو ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ*‬

‫اﺳﻢ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ ووﻇﻴﻔﺘﻪ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻨﴫ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒري اﻟﺼﻮر ﺣﺘﻰ أرﺑﻊ ﻣﺮات ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺠﻢ اﻷﺻﲇ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪.C/X/x/c‬‬
‫أﻟﺒﻮم‬
‫اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻟﺒﻮم اﻟﺬي ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ واﻟﺼﻮر‬
‫اﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﰲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫منﻂ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺸﺨﴢ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬
‫ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫أﻟﺒﻮم‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﳼ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﺻﻮرة ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻟﺒﻮم اﻟﺬي ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‬ ‫دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك‪ :‬ﻹﻧﺘﺎج ﺻﻮرة ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ داﻛﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل زﻳﺎدة ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة وﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ اﻷﻟﻮان‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﺮوﻳﺠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺴني اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﰲ اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺪاﻛﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫زﻳﺎدة ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺳﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ذاﻛﺮة‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل زﻳﺎدة اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪4AR‬‬
 ‫اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬اﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ اﳌﻨﻘﴤ وزﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫أدﺧﻞ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺼﻮر واﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ DVD‬و‪ Xvid‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺮص‪USB/‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر وﻇﻴﻔﺔ وﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬
‫اﺧﱰ "‪ "USB‬أو "ﻗﺮص" ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪/‬اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.DISPLAY‬‬
‫)اﻟﻄﺮاز ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐري ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﻣﺮة‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪REC TO USB‬‬
‫)‪12(27‬‬ ‫‪PLAY‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬أو ﻟﻨﺴﺦ اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫)‪18(34‬‬ ‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ واﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) USB‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(6‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪1:32:55‬‬

‫أﺻﲇ‪/‬ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ )وﺿﻊ ‪:(DVD-VR‬‬
‫أﺻﲇ أو ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﺤﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪2 ،1‬‬
‫اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ* *‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﻨﻮان أو اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أو اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪ENTER‬‬ ‫‪: DISPLAY‬‬
‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺧﺘﺮ "‪ t‬إﺧﺘﻴﺎر"‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،ENTER‬واﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﻮان )‪ (T‬أو اﻟﻔﺼﻞ )‪ (C‬أو اﻟﻤﺴﺎر )‪ (T‬اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﴏ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻜﺮار اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﻨﻮان أو اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أو اﳌﺴﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﺠﺎري ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ‪/‬إﺟامﱄ ﻋﺪد اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪.N‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺠﺎري ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ‪/‬إﺟامﱄ ﻋﺪد اﻟﻔﺼﻮل‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫‪2 ،1‬‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮايئ* *‬
‫وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﻨﻮان أو اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أو اﳌﺴﺎر ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﳌﺤﺪد‬ ‫‪E‬‬
‫‪2 ،1‬‬
‫إﻋﺎدة* *‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫‪F‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪/‬اﳌﺴﺎرات‪/‬اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎت أو ﻋﻨﻮان‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎرات أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ اﳌﺤﺪد‪/‬اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﳌﺤﺪدة‬ ‫‪G‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎر‪/‬أﻟﺒﻮم‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر‪.‬‬
‫‪2 ،1‬‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪H‬‬
‫إﻋﺎدة ‪* *A-B‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﴫ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳌﺤﺪد‬ ‫‪I‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻷﺟﺰاء اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﺧﱰ "‪ t‬إﺧﺘﻴﺎر"‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﴍﻳﻂ إﻋﺪاد "إﻋﺎدة ‪."A-B‬‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﺜﻮر ﻋﲆ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ )اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ ،(A‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ ووﻇﻴﻔﺘﻪ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻨﴫ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪/‬اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‪/‬اﳌﺴﺎر‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﱃ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ )اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ ،(B‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬اﻟﻔﻬﺮس‬
‫اﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺎر‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﳌﻨﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬا اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان أو اﳌﺸﻬﺪ أو اﳌﺴﺎر أو اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أو اﻟﻔﻬﺮس‬
‫‪ t‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‪ :‬ميﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻌﺾ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﺤﺪد ﻣﺴﺒ ًﻘﺎ ﻛﻌﻤﺮ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣني‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺠﺐ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ أو اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻟﻬﺎ مبﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫أﺧﺮى )اﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬

‫‪,‬‬
‫‪3AR‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻋﻼﻣﺎت‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﱪق‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﳌﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴني‪.‬‬
‫ان ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﻮج ﻣﺠﺎز ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﺮاءة‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻟﺤامﻳﺔ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﺸﻜﻞ إﺿﺎﰲ أﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺑﺎت اﻟﱪق‪ ،‬أو ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﺑﻼ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ أو ﺑﻼ‬
‫اﻻﺧﱰاع ‪ MPEG-4 VISUAL‬ﻻﺟﻞ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻟﻔﱰات ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪ ،‬أﻓﺼﻠﻪ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺸﺨﴢ واﻟﻐري اﻟﺘﺠﺎري ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺠﺪاري‪ .‬ﻫﺬا ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎدي ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮب ﺣﺮﻳﻖ أو ﺣﺪوث‬
‫اﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻻﺟﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﺸﻔﺮات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎدي اﻟﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳري ‪MPEG-4 VISUAL‬‬ ‫اﻟﱪق و ّمتﻮرات ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﺪرة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ أو اﻟﺒﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)"‪ ("MPEG-4 VIDEO‬اﻟﺬي ﻗﺎم‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎدي ﺣﺪوث ﺻﺪﻣﺎت ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺠﻔريه ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﺨﴢ وﻟﻴﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮل اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ‪ .‬أﺳﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ اﱃ اﻟﻔﻨﻴني‬
‫ﻟﻼﻏﺮاض اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ و‪/‬او ﺗﻢ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫اﳌﺨﺘﺼني دون ﺳﻮاﻫﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﻦ ‪MPEG LA‬‬ ‫– اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮن ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻏري ﻗﻴﺎﳼ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ اﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴري ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر )اﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ‪ .MPEG-4 VIDEO‬مل متﻨﺢ اﺟﺎزة‬ ‫)ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أو‬ ‫إﻻ ﻟﺪى ﻣﺤﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﴏاﺣﺔ او ﻳﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻻي ﻏﺮض اﺧﺮ‪ .‬ميﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻠﺐ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪم ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت أو‬
‫اﻻﻃﻼع ﻋﲆ أي ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻀﻤﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫– اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ورﻗﺔ أو‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت اﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻟﺤﺮارة ﺷﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ مبﻮاد اﻟﺪﻋﺎﻳﺔ‪ ٬‬واﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ ‫أﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ أو اﻟﻨﺎر أو ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺪاﺧﲇ واﻟﺘﺠﺎري واﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ اﻻﺟﺎزة‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ .LLC ،MPEG LA‬اﻧﻈﺮ اﳌﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪http://www.mpegla.com‬‬ ‫اﳌﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﺬي ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻪ رﻣﺰ أﻗﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻣٶ ﺧﺮۃ اﻟﻮ ﺣﺪة وﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻋﺮض‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﰲ اﻷﺳﻮاق‬
‫"‪ "DVD‬ميﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﻌامﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ‬ ‫•‬ ‫)ﻋﺮض ﻓﻘﻂ( اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻣﻌ ّﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﻮز‬
‫ﻋﺎم ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DVD‬‬ ‫اﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ اﳌﻌﺮوف ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﺼﻨﻒ ﻋﲆ أﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰر ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‪ ،‬أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪/DVD+RW‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻟﺤامﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻻﺳﺘﻨﺴﺎخ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺌﺔ اﻷوﱃ‪ .‬وﺗﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ أن‬
‫‪) DVD+R/DVD+R DL‬وﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﺌﺔ اﻷوﱃ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ (+VR‬وأﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DVD-RW/‬‬ ‫ميﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DVD-R/DVD-R DL‬وﺿﻊ ‪،VR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ‪ ALL‬ﰲ ﻫﺬا اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ اﻟﺸﻌﺎران "‪"HDMI‬‬ ‫•‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌامل اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺒﴫﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫وﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻋﺮض ﺑﻌﺾ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DVD‬‬
‫و"‪ "PhotoTV HD‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدان ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ اﻟﺨﻄﻮرة ﻋﲆ اﻟﻌﻴﻮن‪ .‬وﻧﻈ ًﺮا ﻟﻜﻮن‬
‫ﻣﺤﻈﻮراً ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻮد اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﻏﻢ‬ ‫أﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﻠﻴﺰر اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬا اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻐﻄﺎء اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪DVP-‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ أي رﻣﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﻄﻮ‬
‫‪ SR750HP‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD/DVD‬ﺿﺎرة ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻮن‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫اﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬وذﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺎول ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ اﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪00V 00Hz‬‬
‫‪DVP–XXXX‬‬

‫‪X‬‬ ‫رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﺗﺮك أﻋامل اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎص اﳌﺆﻫﻠني‬

‫‪NO.‬‬
‫‪00W‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪0-000-000-00‬‬

‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎت‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﳌﻨﻊ ﺧﻄﺮ اﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ واﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻣﺼﻨﻌﻪ ﺑﺘﴫﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ دوﻟﺒﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ أﺷﻴﺎ ًء ﻣﻤﻠﻮءة ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮاﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫"دوﻟﺒﻰ" و ﻋﻼﻣﻪ د ‪ -‬اﻟﺰدوﺟﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت‬ ‫أواين اﻟﺰﻫﻮر‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﻪ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ دوﻟﺒﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫•‬
‫ان "‪،"DVD-RW" ،"DVD+RW‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎيئ اﳌﱰدد ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﻇﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﻮﺻ ًﻼ‬
‫"‪،"DVD+R DL" ،"DVD+R‬‬ ‫مبﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر ﰲ اﻟﺠﺪار‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ وﻟﻮ أوﻗﻔﺖ‬
‫"‪"DVD VIDEO" ،"DVD–R‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫و"‪ "CD‬ﻫام ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎن ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺘﺎن‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺮ ّﻛﺐ ﻫﺬا اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﰲ ﺣﻴﺰ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻔري اﻟﺼﻮت ‪MPEG Layer-3‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫رف اﻟﻜﺘﺐ أو وﺣﺪة ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫وﺑﺮاءات اﻻﺧﱰاع اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ Fraunhofer IIS‬و‪.Thomson‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫ﺗﻢ دﻣﺞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺒﻴﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﰲ اﻟﺤﺎل ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪوث ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪد ذو اﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪(HDMITM‬‬ ‫إذا ﺗﻢ إﺣﻀﺎر اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎرد‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺬا‪ .‬إن ‪ HDMI‬وﺷﻌﺎر‬ ‫إﱃ ﻣﻜﺎن داﻓﺊ ﻣﺒﺎﴍة‪ ،‬أو ﺗﻢ وﺿﻌﻪ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬واﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺒﻴﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪد‬ ‫ﰲ ﺣﺠﺮة ﺷﺪﻳﺪة اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻜﺜﻒ‬
‫ذو اﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎت داﺧﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ .‬إذا‬
‫أو ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪث ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ HDMI Licensing LLC‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﻧﺰع اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪة ودول أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫واﺗﺮك اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳌﺪة‬
‫)‪ DVP-SR750HP‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪2AR‬‬
 4-266-023-41(1)

Printed in China